18-Channel Digital Proportional R/C System
TM

TM

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

1M23N30215

TABLE OF CONTENTSINTRODUCTION............................................... 4
Ɣ6XSSRUWDQG6HUYLFH......................................... 4Ɣ6.%U6:LULQJH[DPSOH................................... 38

Ɣ$SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ........... 5Ɣ6.%U66.%U62GHYLFHVHWWLQJ......................... 4ƔCRPSOLDQFHIQIRUPDWLRQ6WDWHPHQW............... 5

Ɣ6ZLWFKKDUQHVV................................................ 41

Ɣ6.%U626\VWHP................................................ 39ƔDH¿QLWLRQVRI6\PEROV...................................... 7
Ɣ6DIHW\3UHFDXWLRQV GRQRWRSHUDWHZLWKRXWUHDGLQJ ............................................................. 7%$6ICO3(R$TION....................................... 42
Ɣ+RPHVFUHHQ.................................................... 42
Ɣ/LQNSURFHGXUH.............................................. 43%()OR(U6(................................................... 11Ɣ)HDWXUHV.......................................................... 11

Ɣ$IWHUVHWWLQJ..................................................... 44ƔCRQWHQWVDQGWHFKQLFDOVSHFL¿FDWLRQV........... 12ƔIIWKHUHFHLYHU VYROWDJHGRHVQRWGLVSOD\RQ
WKHWUDQVPLWWHU............................................... 45

Ɣ0XOWLFRSWHURRERWVSHFL¿FDWLRQV.................. 12ƔRDQJHWHVWLQJ\RXURCV\VWHP...................... 46

Ɣ$FFHVVRULHV....................................................... 13ƔTUDQVPLWWHUFRQWUROV....................................... 14ƔTUDQVPLWWHU VDQWHQQD.................................... 15
Ɣ6ZLWFK 6$6+ ............................................... 16
Ɣ9ROXPH............................................................ 17
Ɣ6OLGH/HYHU....................................................... 17ƔDLJLWDOTULPV T1T6 ..................................... 18ƔTUDQVPLWWHU/L)H%DWWHU\)T2)21%92.... 19
Ɣ+RZWRWXUQWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHUONO))..... 21ƔTRXFK3DQHO..................................................... 22
Ɣ+O0((;ITDQGU.0(NU0ON............... 22
Ɣ3DQHOORFN........................................................ 23ƔR)RIIPRGH..................................................... 23
Ɣ0RQLWRU/(DGLVSOD\...................................... 24
Ɣ6WLFNFRQWURO.................................................... 24
6WLFNFRQWURO $LUSODQH([DPSOH ................. 25
6WLFNFRQWURO +HOLFRSWHU([DPSOH .............. 26
6WLFNFRQWURO 0XOWLFRSWHU([DPSOH ............ 27
Ɣ6WLFN$GMXVWPHQW............................................ 28
Ɣ$GMXVWPHQWRITKURWWOH6WLFN RDWFKHW ........ 3
Ɣ6DFDUG............................................................ 31ƔCRQQHFWRU3OXJ............................................... 32ƔRHFHLYHUQRPHQFODWXUH................................... 33ƔRHFHLYHU VDQWHQQDLQVWDOODWLRQ...................... 35
Ɣ6DIHW\SUHFDXWLRQVZKHQLQVWDOOLQJVHUYRV... 36
Ɣ6.%U66.%U62IQVWDOODWLRQ............................ 37

0RGHO%DVLF6HWWLQJ3URFHGXUH........................ 47$LUSODQH........................................................... 47+HOLFRSWHU........................................................ 49
6HUYRVFRQQHFWLRQE\PRGHOW\SH.................. 52
6<6T(00(NU............................................... 58
DLVSOD\............................................................. 59
6RXQGYROXPH................................................. 6
DDWHDQGTLPH................................................. 6+:VHWWLQJ..................................................... 61%DWWHU\............................................................. 62
RDQJHFKHFN.........................................62 ĺ46
6.%XVVHUYR..................................................... 63
IQIRUPDWLRQ.................................................... 66/IN.$*(0(NU............................................ 67
6HUYRPRQLWRU................................................. 68
0RGHOVHOHFW.................................................... 69
0RGHOW\SH...................................................... 72
6HUYRUHYHUVH................................................... 74(QGSRLQW......................................................... 75
6HUYRVSHHG..................................................... 76
6XEWULP.......................................................... 76)XQFWLRQ.......................................................... 77)DLOVDIH........................................................... 79
6\VWHPW\SH..................................................... 8
TULPVHWWLQJ T1T6 ...................................... 82

TABLE OF CONTENTSTKURWWOHFXW..................................................... 83
IGOHGRZQ......................................................... 84
6ZDVKULQJ +HOLRQO\ .................................... 85
6ZDVK +HOLRQO\H[FHSW+1 ........................ 86
6WLFNDODUP...................................................... 88
TLPHU............................................................... 89)XQFWLRQQDPH................................................ 91
THOHPHWU\V\VWHP............................................ 92
6HQVRU.............................................................. 94
THOHPHWU\......................................................... 97
THOHPHWU\RHFHLYHU>%DWWHU\@........................ 98
THOHPHWU\RHFHLYHU>([WEDWW@....................... 99
THOHPHWU\THPSHUDWXUH............................... 1
THOHPHWU\R30VHQVRU................................ 11
THOHPHWU\$OWLWXGH....................................... 12
THOHPHWU\$OWLWXGH>9DULRPHWHU@................ 13
THOHPHWU\9ROWDJH>%DWWHU\@........................ 16
THOHPHWU\9ROWDJH>([WEDWW@....................... 17
THOHPHWU\*36>DLVWDQFH@........................... 18
THOHPHWU\*36>6SHHG@................................ 11
THOHPHWU\*36>$OWLWXGH9DULRPHWHU3RVLWLRQ@.111
THOHPHWU\6HUYRVHQVRU>CXUUHQW@.............. 112
THOHPHWU\6HUYRVHQVRU>THPSHUDWXUH$QJOH@113
THOHPHWU\CXUUHQWVHQVRU>CXUUHQW@.......... 114
THOH.VHWWLQJ THOHPHWU\VHWWLQJ .................. 115
TUDLQHU........................................................... 117:DUQLQJVHWWLQJ............................................ 12
UVHUPHQXVHWWLQJ......................................... 121
DDWDUHVHW...................................................... 122
0OD(/0(NU CRPPRQIXQFWLRQV .......... 123
CRQGLWLRQVHOHFW........................................... 124$)R.............................................................. 126
DXDOUDWH........................................................ 127
3URJUDPPL[HV............................................. 128
0OD(/0(NU $LUSODQH*OLGHU0XOWLFRSWHU$LOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDO....................................... 132)ODSVHWWLQJ.................................................... 133$I/→ CDPEHUÀDS...................................... 134$I/→ %UDNHÀDS......................................... 135$LOHURQ→ RXGGHU........................................ 136(OHYDWRU→CDPEHU..................................... 137
CDPEHUPL[LQJ............................................. 138$LUEUDNH → (/(.......................................... 14
CDPEHUÀDS → (/(..................................... 141
RXGGHU → $LOHURQ........................................ 142
RXGGHU → (OHYDWRU...................................... 143%XWWHUÀ\........................................................ 144
TULPPL[12.................................................. 146
6QDSUROO $LUSODQHRQO\ ............................. 147$LUEUDNH $LUSODQHRQO\ ............................ 148*\UR.............................................................. 149$LOHYDWRU........................................................ 151$FFHOHUDWLRQ.................................................. 152
0RWRU............................................................. 153
9WDLO.............................................................. 154:LQJOHW.......................................................... 155
0OD(/0(NU +HOLFRSWHU
3LWFKFXUYH.................................................... 157
TKURWWOHFXUYH............................................... 16
$FFHOHUDWLRQ.................................................. 162
TKURWWOHKROG................................................. 163
6ZDVKPL[LQJ................................................ 164
TKURWWOHPL[LQJ............................................. 165
3LWFK → NHHGOH.............................................. 166
3LWFK → RXGGHU RHYROXWLRQPL[LQJ ......... 167*\UR +HOLFRSWHU ......................................... 168*RYHUQRU....................................................... 17
CRPPRQOSHUDWLRQVXVHGLQIXQFWLRQVHWXSVFUHHQ................................................................ 172
ƔOSHUDWLRQVYDOXHVHWWLQJ............................... 172
ƔOSHUDWLRQVUHODWHGWRÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV....... 172
ƔOSHUDWLRQVUHODWHGWR¿QHWXQLQJ9R.......... 173
ƔOSHUDWLRQVUHODWHGWRVHUYRVSHHG............... 174
ƔCXUYHVHWWLQJRSHUDWLRQ................................ 175
Ɣ6ZLWFKVHOHFWLRQPHWKRG............................... 18
ƔUSGDWLQJ........................................................ 184
ƔT146*);22 ⇒ T186=D$T$................... 186

INTRODUCTION
7KDQN \RX IRU SXUFKDVLQJ D )XWDED )$667HVW*+]  76= VHULHV GLJLWDO SURSRUWLRQDO 5&
V\VWHP7KLVV\VWHPLVH[WUHPHO\YHUVDWLOHDQGPD\EHXVHGE\EHJLQQHUVDQGSURVDOLNH,QRUGHUIRU\RXWRPDNHWKHEHVWXVHRI\RXUV\VWHPDQGWRÀ\VDIHO\SOHDVHUHDGWKLVPDQXDOFDUHIXOO\
,I \RX KDYH DQ\ GLIILFXOWLHV ZKLOH XVLQJ \RXU V\VWHP SOHDVH FRQVXOW WKH PDQXDO RXU RQOLQH
)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG 4XHVWLRQV RQ WKH ZHE SDJHV UHIHUHQFHG EHORZ  \RXU KREE\ GHDOHU RU WKH)XWDED6HUYLFH&HQWHU
)$667HVW)XWDED$GYDQFHG6SUHDG6SHFWUXP7HFKQRORJ\H[WHQGV\VWHPWHOHPHWU\'XHWRXQIRUHVHHQFKDQJHVLQSURGXFWLRQSURFHGXUHVWKHLQIRUPDWLRQFRQWDLQHGLQWKLVPDQXDOLV
VXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH
6XSSRUWDQG6HUYLFH,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWRKDYH\RXU)XWDEDHTXLSPHQWVHUYLFHGDQQXDOO\GXULQJ
\RXUKREE\¶V³RIIVHDVRQ´WRHQVXUHVDIHRSHUDWLRQIQNRUWK$PHULFD
3OHDVH IHHO IUHH WR FRQWDFW WKH )XWDED 6HUYLFH &HQWHU IRU DVVLVWDQFH LQ RSHUDWLRQ XVH DQGSURJUDPPLQJ3OHDVHEHVXUHWRUHJXODUO\YLVLWWKH76=)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQVZHEVLWH
DW ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT 7KLV SDJH LQFOXGHV H[WHQVLYH SURJUDPPLQJ XVH VHW XS DQG VDIHW\
LQIRUPDWLRQRQWKH76=UDGLRV\VWHPDQGLVXSGDWHGUHJXODUO\$Q\WHFKQLFDOXSGDWHVDQG86PDQXDO FRUUHFWLRQV ZLOO EH DYDLODEOH RQ WKLV ZHE SDJH ,I \RX GR QRW ¿QG WKH DQVZHUV WR \RXU
TXHVWLRQVWKHUHSOHDVHVHHWKHHQGRIRXU)$4DUHDIRULQIRUPDWLRQRQFRQWDFWLQJXVYLDHPDLOIRUWKHPRVWUDSLGDQGFRQYHQLHQWUHVSRQVH
'RQ¶W KDYH ,QWHUQHW DFFHVV" ,QWHUQHW DFFHVV LV DYDLODEOH DW QR FKDUJH DW PRVW SXEOLF OLEUDULHVVFKRROVDQGRWKHUSXEOLFUHVRXUFHV:H¿QGLQWHUQHWVXSSRUWWREHDIDEXORXVUHIHUHQFHIRUPDQ\PRGHOHUVDVLWHPVFDQEHSULQWHGDQGVDYHGIRUIXWXUHUHIHUHQFHDQGFDQEHDFFHVVHGDWDQ\KRXURIWKHGD\QLJKWZHHNHQGRUKROLGD\,I\RXGRQRWZLVKWRDFFHVVWKHLQWHUQHWIRULQIRUPDWLRQKRZHYHUGRQ¶WZRUU\2XUVXSSRUWWHDPVDUHDYDLODEOH0RQGD\WKURXJK)ULGD\&HQWUDOWLPH
WRDVVLVW\RX)RU6HUYLFHOQO\)XWDED6HUYLFH&HQWHU
1$SROOR'ULYH6XLWH
&KDPSDLJQ,/
3KRQHZZZIXWDEDUFFRPVHUYLFHKWPO(PDLOIXWDEDVHUYLFH#KREELFRFRP

)RU6XSSRUW
3URJUDPPLQJDQGXVHUTXHVWLRQV 
3OHDVHVWDUWKHUHIRUDQVZHUVWRPRVWTXHVWLRQVZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT)D[
3KRQHRSWLRQOXWVLGHNRUWK$PHULFD
3OHDVHFRQWDFW\RXU)XWDEDLPSRUWHULQ\RXUUHJLRQRIWKHZRUOGWRDVVLVW\RXZLWKDQ\TXHVWLRQVSUREOHPVRUVHUYLFHQHHGV3OHDVH UHFRJQL]H WKDW DOO LQIRUPDWLRQ LQ WKLV PDQXDO DQG DOO VXSSRUW DYDLODELOLW\ LV EDVHG XSRQWKHV\VWHPVVROGLQ1RUWK$PHULFDRQO\3URGXFWVSXUFKDVHGHOVHZKHUHPD\YDU\$OZD\VFRQWDFW\RXUUHJLRQ¶VVXSSRUWFHQWHUIRUDVVLVWDQFH

4 ＜ Introduction ＞

$SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ7KLVSURGXFWPD\EHXVHGIRUXQPDQQHGDHULDOYHKLFOHXVH,WLVQRWLQWHQGHGIRUXVHLQDQ\DSSOLFDWLRQRWKHUWKDQXQPDQQHGDHULDOYHKLFOHFRQWURO7KHSURGXFWLVVXEMHFWWRUHJXODWLRQVRIWKH0LQLVWU\RI5DGLR7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQV
DQGLVUHVWULFWHGXQGHU-DSDQHVHODZWRVXFKSXUSRVHV([SRUWDWLRQSUHFDXWLRQV
D :KHQWKLVSURGXFWLVH[SRUWHGIURPWKHFRXQWU\RIPDQXIDFWXUHLWVXVHLVWREHDSSURYHGE\WKHODZVJRYHUQLQJWKHFRXQWU\RIGHVWLQDWLRQZKLFKJRYHUQGHYLFHVWKDWHPLWUDGLRIUHTXHQFLHV,IWKLVSURGXFWLVWKHQUHH[SRUWHGWRRWKHUFRXQWULHVLWPD\EHVXEMHFWWRUHVWULFWLRQVRQVXFKH[SRUW3ULRUDSSURYDORIWKHDSSURSULDWHJRYHUQPHQWDXWKRULWLHVPD\
EHUHTXLUHG,I\RXKDYHSXUFKDVHGWKLVSURGXFWIURPDQH[SRUWHURXWVLGH\RXUFRXQWU\DQGQRWWKHDXWKRUL]HG)XWDEDGLVWULEXWRULQ\RXUFRXQWU\SOHDVHFRQWDFWWKHVHOOHULPPHGLDWHO\WRGHWHUPLQHLIVXFKH[SRUWUHJXODWLRQVKDYHEHHQPHWE 8VHRIWKLVSURGXFWZLWKDQ\WKLQJRWKHUWKDQPRGHOVPD\EHUHVWULFWHGE\([SRUWDQG7UDGH&RQWURO5HJXODWLRQV
DQGDQDSSOLFDWLRQIRUH[SRUWDSSURYDOPXVWEHVXEPLWWHG7KLVHTXLSPHQWPXVWQRWEHXWLOL]HGWRRSHUDWHHTXLSPHQWRWKHUWKDQUDGLRFRQWUROOHGPRGHOV 0RGLILFDWLRQ DGMXVWPHQW DQG UHSODFHPHQW RI SDUWV )XWDED LV QRW UHVSRQVLEOH IRU XQDXWKRUL]HG PRGLILFDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWVRQWKLVSURGXFW$Q\VXFKFKDQJHVPD\YRLGWKHZDUUDQW\CRPSOLDQFHIQIRUPDWLRQ6WDWHPHQW
7KLVGHYLFHFRPSOLHVZLWKSDUWRIWKH)&&5XOHV2SHUDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRWKHIROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQV  7KLV GHYLFH PD\ QRW FDXVH KDUPIXO LQWHUIHUHQFH DQG   7KLV GHYLFH PXVW DFFHSW DQ\ LQWHUIHUHQFH UHFHLYHGLQFOXGLQJLQWHUIHUHQFHWKDWPD\FDXVHXQGHVLUHGRSHUDWLRQ
5)5DGLDWLRQ([SRVXUH6WDWHPHQW
7KLVHTXLSPHQWFRPSOLHVZLWK)&&UDGLDWLRQH[SRVXUHOLPLWVVHWIRUWKIRUDQXQFRQWUROOHGHQYLURQPHQW
7KLVWUDQVPLWWHUPXVWQRWEHFRORFDWHGRURSHUDWLQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDQ\RWKHUDQWHQQDRUWUDQVPLWWHU
7KHUHVSRQVLEOHSDUW\IRUWKHFRPSOLDQFHRIWKLVGHYLFHLV)XWDED6HUYLFH&HQWHU1$SROOR'ULYH6XLWH&KDPSDLJQ,/86$
7(/  RU(PDLOVXSSRUW#KREELFRFRP 6XSSRUW
7(/  RU(PDLOIXWDEDVHUYLFH#KREELFRFRP 6HUYLFH 
7KH5%5&6($/RQWKHQLFNHOFDGPLXPEDWWHU\FRQWDLQHGLQ)XWDEDSURGXFWVLQGLFDWHVWKDW)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQ LV YROXQWDULO\ SDUWLFLSDWLQJ LQ DQ LQGXVWU\ZLGH SURJUDP WR FROOHFW DQG UHF\FOH WKHVH
EDWWHULHV DW WKH HQG RI WKHLU XVHIXO OLYHV ZKHQ WDNHQ RXW RI VHUYLFH ZLWKLQ WKH 8QLWHG 6WDWHV 7KH
5%5&SURJUDPSURYLGHVDFRQYHQLHQWDOWHUQDWLYHWRSODFLQJXVHGQLFNHOFDGPLXPEDWWHULHVLQWRWKH
WUDVKRUPXQLFLSDOZDVWHV\VWHPZKLFKLVLOOHJDOLQVRPHDUHDV IRU86$ <RX PD\ FRQWDFW \RXU ORFDO UHF\FOLQJ FHQWHU IRU LQIRUPDWLRQ RQ ZKHUH WR UHWXUQ WKH VSHQW EDWWHU\ 3OHDVH FDOO
%$77(5< IRU LQIRUPDWLRQ RQ 1L&G EDWWHU\ UHF\FOLQJ LQ \RXU DUHD )XWDED &RUSRUDWLRQ LQYROYHPHQW LQ WKLVSURJUDPLVSDUWRILWVFRPPLWPHQWWRSURWHFWLQJRXUHQYLURQPHQWDQGFRQVHUYLQJQDWXUDOUHVRXUFHV
5%5&LVDWUDGHPDUNRIWKH5HFKDUJHDEOH%DWWHU\5HF\FOLQJ&RUSRUDWLRQIC
7KLV GHYLFH FRPSOLHV ZLWK ,QGXVWU\ &DQDGD OLFHQVHH[HPSW 566 VWDQGDUG V  2SHUDWLRQ LV VXEMHFW WR WKH IROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQV  WKLVGHYLFHPD\QRWFDXVHLQWHUIHUHQFHDQG  WKLVGHYLFHPXVWDFFHSWDQ\LQWHUIHUHQFHLQFOXGLQJLQWHUIHUHQFHWKDWPD\FDXVHXQGHVLUHGRSHUDWLRQRIWKHGHYLFH
7KLVHTXLSPHQWFRPSOLHVZLWK,&UDGLDWLRQH[SRVXUHOLPLWVVHWIRUWKIRUDQXQFRQWUROOHGHQYLURQPHQW7KLVWUDQVPLWWHUPXVWQRWEHFRORFDWHGRURSHUDWLQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDQ\RWKHUDQWHQQDRUWUDQVPLWWHU
)UHQFK&HWDSSDUHLOUDGLRHVWFRQIRUPHDX&15G¶,QGXVWULH&DQDGD/¶XWLOLVDWLRQGHFHGLVSRVLWLIHVWDXWRULVpHVHXOHPHQWDX[GHX[ FRQGLWLRQV VXLYDQWHV    LO QH GRLW SDV SURGXLUH GH EURXLOODJH HW   O¶XWLOLVDWHXU GX GLVSRVLWLI GRLW rWUH SUrW j
DFFHSWHUWRXWEURXLOODJHUDGLRpOHFWULTXHUHoXPrPHVLFHEURXLOODJHHVWVXVFHSWLEOHGHFRPSURPHWWUHOHIRQFWLRQQHPHQWGXGLVSRVLWLI&HW pTXLSHPHQW HVW FRQIRUPH DX[ OLPLWHV G H[SRVLWLRQ DX UD\RQQHPHQW GX &, pWDEOLHV SRXU XQ HQYLURQQHPHQW QRQFRQWU{Op&HWpPHWWHXUQHGRLWSDVrWUHFRVLWXpRXIRQFWLRQQHUFRQMRLQWHPHQWDYHFXQHDXWUHDQWHQQHRXpPHWWHXU

＜ Introduction ＞ 5

DHFODUDWLRQRICRQIRUPLW\ IRU(U+HUHE\)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQGHFODUHVWKDWWKHUDGLRHTXLSPHQWW\SHLVLQFRPSOLDQFHZLWK'LUHFWLYH(8
7KHIXOOWH[WRIWKH(8GHFODUDWLRQRIFRQIRUPLW\LVDYDLODEOHDWWKHIROORZLQJLQWHUQHWDGGUHVVKWWSZZZ.UF.IXWDED.FR.MSHQJOLVKGOGHFODUDWLRQV.KWPO)HGHUDOCRPPXQLFDWLRQVCRPPLVVLRQIQWHUIHUHQFH6WDWHPHQW IRUU.6.$.
7KLVHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGIRXQGWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKHOLPLWVIRUD&ODVV%GLJLWDOGHYLFHSXUVXDQW WR 3DUW  RI WKH )&& 5XOHV 7KHVH OLPLWV DUH GHVLJQHG WR SURYLGH UHDVRQDEOH SURWHFWLRQ DJDLQVW KDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHLQDUHVLGHQWLDOLQVWDOODWLRQ7KLVHTXLSPHQWJHQHUDWHVXVHVDQGFDQUDGLDWHUDGLRIUHTXHQF\HQHUJ\DQGLI
QRWLQVWDOOHGDQGXVHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVPD\FDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV+RZHYHUWKHUHLVQRJXDUDQWHHWKDWLQWHUIHUHQFHZLOOQRWRFFXULQDSDUWLFXODULQVWDOODWLRQ,IWKLVHTXLSPHQWGRHVFDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRRUWHOHYLVLRQUHFHSWLRQZKLFKFDQEHGHWHUPLQHGE\WXUQLQJWKHHTXLSPHQWRIIDQGRQWKH
XVHULVHQFRXUDJHGWRWU\WRFRUUHFWWKHLQWHUIHUHQFHE\RQHRUPRUHRIWKHIROORZLQJPHDVXUHV5HRULHQWRUUHORFDWHWKHUHFHLYLQJDQWHQQD
,QFUHDVHWKHVHSDUDWLRQEHWZHHQWKHHTXLSPHQWDQGUHFHLYHU
&RQQHFWWKHHTXLSPHQWLQWRDQRXWOHWRQDFLUFXLWGLIIHUHQWIURPWKDWWRZKLFKWKHUHFHLYHULVFRQQHFWHG
&RQVXOWWKHGHDOHURUDQH[SHULHQFHGUDGLR79WHFKQLFLDQIRUKHOSC$UTION
7RDVVXUHFRQWLQXHG)&&FRPSOLDQFH
$Q\FKDQJHVRUPRGL¿FDWLRQVQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHJUDQWHHRIWKLVGHYLFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU¶VDXWKRULW\WR
RSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW)O\LQJ6DIHW\:KHUHWR)O\:HUHFRPPHQGWKDW\RXÀ\DWDUHFRJQL]HGPRGHODLUSODQHÀ\LQJ¿HOG<RXFDQ¿QGPRGHOFOXEVDQG¿HOGVE\DVNLQJ\RXUQHDUHVWKREE\GHDOHURULQWKH86E\FRQWDFWLQJWKH$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV
7KHQDWLRQDO$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV $0$ KDVPRUHWKDQFKDUWHUHGFOXEVDFURVVWKHFRXQWU\7KURXJKDQ\RQHRI
WKHPLQVWUXFWRUWUDLQLQJSURJUDPVDQGLQVXUHGQHZFRPHUWUDLQLQJDUHDYDLODEOH&RQWDFWWKH$0$DWWKHDGGUHVVRUWROOIUHHSKRQH
QXPEHUEHORZ

$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV(DVW0HPRULDO'ULYH
0XQFLH,1
7HOH  
)D[  
RUYLDWKH,QWHUQHWDWKWWS??ZZZPRGHODLUFUDIWRUJ$OZD\VSD\SDUWLFXODUDWWHQWLRQWRWKHÀ\LQJ¿HOG¶VUXOHVDVZHOODVWKHSUHVHQFHDQGORFDWLRQRIVSHFWDWRUVWKH
ZLQG GLUHFWLRQ DQG DQ\ REVWDFOHV RQ WKH ¿HOG %H YHU\ FDUHIXOÀ\LQJ LQ DUHDV QHDU SRZHU OLQHV WDOO EXLOGLQJV RU
FRPPXQLFDWLRQIDFLOLWLHVDVWKHUHPD\EHUDGLRLQWHUIHUHQFHLQWKHLUYLFLQLW\

6 ＜ Introduction ＞

3UHFDXWLRQV$SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ3UHFDXWLRQV.
7KLVSURGXFWLVRQO\GHVLJQHGIRUXVHZLWKUDGLRFRQWUROPRGHOV8VHRIWKHSURGXFWGHVFULEHGLQWKLVLQVWUXFWLRQPDQXDOLVOLPLWHGWRUDGLRFRQWUROPRGHOV
([SRUWSUHFDXWLRQVD :KHQWKLVSURGXFWLVH[SRUWHGLWFDQQRWEHXVHGZKHUHSURKLELWHGE\WKHODZVJRYHUQLQJUDGLRZDYHVRIWKHGHVWLQDWLRQFRXQWU\E 8VHRIWKLVSURGXFWZLWKRWKHUWKDQPRGHOVPD\EHUHVWULFWHGE\([SRUWDQG7UDGH&RQWURO5HJXODWLRQV0RGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGSDUWVUHSODFHPHQW)XWDEDLVQRWUHVSRQVLEOHIRUXQDXWKRUL]HGPRGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWRUUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWVRQWKLVSURGXFWŶ1RSDUWRIWKLVPDQXDOPD\EHUHSURGXFHGLQDQ\IRUPZLWKRXWSULRUSHUPLVVLRQŶ7KHFRQWHQWVRIWKLVPDQXDODUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWSULRUQRWLFH
Ŷ7KHFRQWHQWVRIWKLVPDQXDOVKRXOGEHFRPSOHWHEXWLIWKHUHDUHDQ\XQFOHDURUPLVVLQJSDUWVSOHDVHFRQWDFWD)XWDED6HUYLFH
&HQWHUŶ)XWDEDLVQRWUHVSRQVLEOHIRUWKHXVHRIWKLVSURGXFWE\WKHFXVWRPHU
Ŷ&RPSDQ\DQGSURGXFWQDPHVLQWKLVPDQXDODUHWUDGHPDUNVRUUHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUNVRIWKHUHVSHFWLYHFRPSDQ\)RUVDIHXVH
3OHDVHREVHUYHWKHIROORZLQJSUHFDXWLRQVWRHQVXUHVDIHXVHRIWKLVSURGXFWDWDOOWLPHV
0HDQLQJRI6SHFLDO0DUNLQJV
7KHSDUWVRIWKLVPDQXDOLQGLFDWHGE\WKHIROORZLQJPDUNVUHTXLUHVSHFLDODWWHQWLRQIURPWKHVWDQGSRLQWRIVDIHW\DANGER  3URFHGXUHV ZKLFK PD\ OHDG WR GDQJHURXV FRQGLWLRQV DQG FDXVH GHDWKVHULRXV LQMXU\ LI QRW FDUULHG RXWSURSHUO\.
WARNING 3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRDGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQRUFDXVHGHDWKRUVHULRXVLQMXU\WRWKHXVHULIQRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\RUSURFHGXUHVZKHUHWKHSUREDELOLW\RIVXSHU¿FLDOLQMXU\RUSK\VLFDOGDPDJHLVKLJK.
CAUTION 3URFHGXUHVZKHUHWKHSRVVLELOLW\RIVHULRXVLQMXU\WRWKHXVHULVVPDOOEXWWKHUHLVDGDQJHURILQMXU\RU
SK\VLFDOGDPDJHLIQRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\.3URKLELWHG

0DQGDWRU\:$RNIN*$OZD\VNHHSHOHFWULFDOFRPSRQHQWVDZD\IURPVPDOOFKLOGUHQ.

Flying Precautions
WARNING

Never grasp the transmitter antenna while
ﬂying.
■ The transmitter output may drop drastically.

Always make sure that all transmitter stick
movements operate all servos properly in themodel prior to flight. Also, make sure that all
switches, etc. function properly as well. If there
are any diﬃculties, do not use the system until all
inputs are functioning properly.
Never ﬂy in range check mode.
■ In the dedicated range test range check mode, thetransmitter output range is reduced and may cause acrash.

While operating, never touch the transmitter
with, or bring the transmitter near, another transmitter, a cellphone, or other wireless devices.

■ The antenna is directional and the transmitter output
is weakest. (The strength of the radio waves is greatest
from the sides of the antenna.)

Never fly on a rainy day, when the wind isstrong, or at night.
■ Water could lead to failure or improper functionality
and poor control of the aircraft which could lead to acrash.

Never turn the power switch off during flightor while the engine or motor is running.
■ Operation will become impossible and the aircraft willcrash. Even if the power switch is turned on, operation
will not begin until transmitter and receiver internal
processing is complete.

Do not start the engine or motor while wearing
the neck strap.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

■ The neck strap may become entangled with the rotating propeller, rotor, etc. and cause a serious injury.

Do not point the antenna directly toward theaircraft during ﬂight.

Do not ﬂy when you are physically impaired as
it could pose a safety hazard to yourself or others.

＜ Introduction ＞ 7

Do not ﬂy at the following places:■ Near another radio control ﬂying ﬁeld.
■ Near or above people.
■ Near homes, schools, hospitals or other places where
people congregate.
■ Near high voltage lines, high structures, or communication facilities.

When setting the transmitter on the ground
during ﬂight preparations, do not stand it upright.
■ The transmitter may tip over, the sticks may move andthe propeller or rotor may rotate unexpectedly andcause injury.

Do not touch the engine, motor, or ESC during
and immediately after use.
■ These items may become hot during use.

For safety, ﬂy so that the aircraft is visible at all
times.
■ Flying behind buildings or other large structures will
not only cause you to lose sight of the aircraft, but also degrade the RF link performance and cause loss ofcontrol.

From the standpoint of safety, always set the
fail safe function.
■ In particular, normally set the throttle channel to idle.
For a helicopter, set the throttle channel to maintain ahover.

When ﬂying, always return the transmitter setup screen to the Home screen.
■ Erroneous input during ﬂight is extremely dangerous.

Always check the remaining capacity of thetransmitter and receiver batteries before each ﬂying session prior to ﬂight.

Always check operation of each control surface
and perform a range test before each ﬂying session. Also, when using the trainer function, checkthe operation of both the teacher and student
transmitter.
■ Even one incorrect transmitter setting or aircraft abnormality can cause a crash.

Before turning on the transmitter:
1. Always move the transmitter throttle stick position to
the minimum (idle) position.
2. Turn on the transmitter ﬁrst and then the receiver.

When turning off the transmitter's powerswitch after the engine or motor has stopped(state in which it will not rotate again):
1. Turn oﬀ the receiver power switch.
2. Then turn oﬀ the transmitter power switch.
■ If the power switch is turned on/oﬀ in the opposite order, the propeller may rotate unexpectedly and cause
a serious injury.
■ Also always observe the above order when setting thefail safe function.

When adjusting the transmitter, stop theengine except when necessary. In the case of a
motor, disconnect the wiring that allows it to continue operation. When doing so, please exercise
extreme caution. Ensure that the aircraft is secured and that it will not come into contact withanything or anyone. Ensure that the motor will
not rotate prior to making any adjustments.
■ Unexpected high speed rotation of the engine may
cause a serious injury.

■ Low battery capacity will cause loss of control and acrash.

Battery and Charger Handling Precautions
DANGER

Do not recharge a battery that is damaged, deteriorated, leaking electrolyte, or wet.

Do not charge and store the battery in direct
sunlight or other hot places.

Do not use the charger in applications otherthan as intended.

Do not charge the battery if it is covered withany object as it may become very hot.

Do not allow the charger or battery to become
wet.

Do not use the battery in a combustible environment.

■ Do not use the charger when it or your hands are wet.
Do not use the charger in humid places.

■ The combustibles may could ignite ignite and cause an
explosion or ﬁre.

Do not short circuit the battery.
Do not solder, repair, deform, modify, or disassemble the battery and/or battery charger.
Do not drop the battery into a fire or bring it
near a ﬁre.

8 ＜ Introduction ＞

Always charge the battery before each flying
session.
■ If the battery goes dead during ﬂight, the aircraft willcrash.

Charge the battery with the dedicated charger
supplied with the set.

■ Charging the battery past the specified value may
cause a fire, combustion, rupture, or liquid leakage.
When quick charging, do not charge the battery above
1C.
■ Do not charge the battery while riding in a vehicle. Vibration will prevent normal charging.

When using the Li-Fe battery, do not connectthe charger to the balance charge connector andthe power connector at the same time.
■ Doing so could cause a ﬁre, combustion, generation ofheat, rupture, or liquid leakage.

Insert the power cord plug firmly into thereceptacle up to its base.
Always use the charger with the specified
power supply voltage.
■ Use the special charger by connecting it to a proper
power outlet.

If the battery liquid should get in your eyes, do
not rub your eyes, but immediately wash themwith tap water or other clean water and get treated by a doctor.
■ The liquid can cause blindness.

WARNING

Do not touch the charger and battery for any
length of time during charging.

Use and store the battery and battery charger
in a secure location away from children.

■ Doing so may result in burns.

■ Not doing so may cause electric shock or injury.

Do not use a charger or battery that has beendamaged.

If the battery leaks liquid or generates an abnormal odor, immediately move it to a safe placefor disposal.

Do not touch any of the internal componentsof the charger.
■ Doing so may cause electric shock or a burn.

If any abnormalities such as smoke or discoloration are noted with either the charger or the battery, remove the battery from the transmitter or
charger and disconnect the power cord plug anddo not use the charger.
■ Continued use may cause ﬁre, combustion, generationof heat, or rupture.

Do not subject the batteries to impact.
■ Doing so may cause fire, combustion, generation ofheat, rupture, or liquid leakage.

■ Not doing so may cause combustion.

If the battery liquid gets on your skin or clothing, immediately ﬂush the area with tap water orother clean water.
■ Consult a doctor. The liquid can cause skin damage.

After the speciﬁed charging time has elapsed,
end charging and disconnect the charger from thereceptacle.
When recycling or disposing of the battery, isolate the terminals by covering them with tape.
■ Short circuit of the terminals may cause combustion,
generation of heat or rupture.

CAUTION

Do not use the battery with devices other thanthe corresponding transmitter.
Do not place heavy objects on top of the battery or charger. Also, do not place the battery or
charger in any location where it may fall.
■ Doing so may cause damage or injury.

Do not store or use the battery and charger
where it is dusty or humid.
■ Insert the power cord plug into the receptacle only after eliminating the dust.

After the transmitter has been used for a longtime, the battery may become hot. Immediately
remove it from the transmitter.

■ Not doing so may cause a burn.

Do not charge the battery in extreme temperatures.
■ Doing so will degrade the battery performance. An ambient temperature of 10℃ to 30℃ (50 ℉ to 86 ℉ ) is
ideal for charging.

Unplug the charger when not in use.
Do not bend or pull the cord unreasonably anddo not place heavy objects on the cord.
■ The power cord may be damaged and cause combustion, generation of heat, or electric shock.

＜ Introduction ＞ 9

SD Card (Commercial Product) Handling Precautions
5HDGWKHLQVWUXFWLRQPDQXDOVXSSOLHGZLWKWKH6'FDUGIRUGHWDLOVWARNING

Never disassemble or modify the SD card.
Do not bend, drop, scratch or place heavy objects on the SD card.
If smoke or an abnormal odor emanates from thecard, immediately turn oﬀ the transmitter power.

Do not use the SD card where it may be exposed to water, chemicals, oil, or other ﬂuids.
■ Doing so may cause a ﬁre or electric shock by short circuiting.

CAUTION

Since the SD card is an electronic device, be
careful of static electricity.

Do not insert foreign matter into the transmitter card slot.

■ Static electricity may cause erroneous operation orother trouble.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

Do not use the SD card near radio and television sets, audio equipment, motors and otherequipment that generates noise.

Do not expose the card to shock and vibrationand do not remove the card from the card slot
while data is being written or read.
■ The data may be damaged or lost.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

● Recorded data

Do not store the SD card in the following places:

The data recorded on the SD card cannot
be compensated regardless of the contents
or cause of the trouble or obstruction.
Futaba does not perform data restoration or
recovery work.

・Where the humidity is high・Where the temperature diﬀerence is severe
・Where it is very dusty
・Where the card will be exposed to shock and vibration
・Near speakers and other magnetic devices

Storage and Disposal Precautions
WARNING

Keep wireless equipment, batteries, aircraft,
etc. away from children.
CAUTION

Do not store wireless devices in the following
places:・Where it is extremely hot (40℃ [104 ℉ ] or higher) or
cold (-10℃ [14 ℉ ] or lower)
・Where the equipment will be exposed to direct sunlight・Where the humidity is high・Where vibration is prevalent・Where it is very dusty
・Where the device may be exposed to steam and heat

When the device will not be used for a longtime, remove the batteries from the transmitterand aircraft and store them in a dry place where
the temperature is between 0℃ and 30℃ [32 ℉
and 86 ℉ ].
■ Leaving batteries inside your model and radio when
they are not being used for long periods will result inbattery deterioration, liquid leakage and other damage.

Other Precautions
CAUTION

Do not directly expose plastic parts to fuel, oil,exhaust gas, etc.

Always use genuine Futaba products such astransmitter, receiver, servo, ESC, battery, etc.

■ If left in such an environment, the plastic may be damaged.

■ Futaba is not responsible for damage sustained by
combination with parts other than Futaba Genuine
Parts. Use the parts speciﬁed in the instruction manualand catalog.

■ Since the metal parts of the case may corrode, always
keep them clean.

Join the Academy of Model Aeronautics.
■ The Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) provides
guidelines and liability protection should the need arise.

10 ＜ Introduction ＞

BEFORE USEũƈƄƗƘƕƈƖŃFASSTest system
The T18SZ transmitter has adopted the bidirectional communication system "FASSTest". Data fromthe receiver can be checked in your transmitter. FASSTest is a maximum 18 channels 2.4GHz dedicatedsystem.
Color touch screen LCD
76=KDVDQ+9*$LQFKIXOOFRORUEDFNOLW/&'WRXFKVFUHHQ7KHVFUHHQLVWUDQVÀHFWLYHZKLFKenables both indoor and outdoor visibility.
S.BUS2 system%\XVLQJWKH6%86V\VWHPPXOWLSOHVHUYRVJ\URVDQGWHOHPHWU\VHQVRUVDUHHDVLO\LQVWDOOHGZLWKD
minimum amount of cables.
Model types
0XOWLFRSWHUVZDVKW\SHVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUKHOLFRSWHUVW\SHVRIPDLQZLQJVDQGW\SHVRIWDLOZLQJV
are available for airplanes and gliders. Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are
set in advance at the factory.
LiFe battery
T18SZ is operated by a 6.6 V/2,100 mAh Lithium Ferrite battery.
SD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)
Model data can be saved to an SD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When T18SZ transmitter
VRIWZDUH¿OHVDUHUHOHDVHGWKHVRIWZDUHFDQEHXSGDWHGE\XVLQJDQ6'FDUGXSGDWH
Edit button
7ZRHGLWEXWWRQVDUHSURYLGHGDQGWKHRSHUDWLQJVFUHHQFDQEHLPPHGLDWHO\³5HWXUQHG´WRWKH+20(VFUHHQGXULQJRSHUDWLRQ6HWWLQJRSHUDWLRQFDQEHSHUIRUPHGHDVLO\E\FRPELQLQJWKLVEXWWRQZLWKDWRXFK
sensor.
Vibration function
Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms by vibrating the transmitter in addition tosounding a buzzer.
Speech function$IXQFWLRQLVHTXLSSHGZKLFKDOORZVWKHV\VWHPWRSURYLGHWHOHPHWU\GDWDDXGLEO\7KLVIXQFWLRQFDQ
DOVREHXWLOL]HGZLWKFRPPHUFLDOO\DYDLODEOHHDUSKRQHV

＜ Before Use ＞ 11

ŦƒƑƗƈƑƗƖŃƄƑƇŃŷƈƆƋƑƌƆƄƏŃŶƓƈƆƌƲƆƄƗƌƒƑƖ
Your T18SZ includes the following components:

6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGUDWLQJVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH

• T18SZ transmitter• R7008SB Receiver• FT2F2100BV2 LiFe battery & charger• Switch harness• Mini driver*The set contents depend on the type of set.

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃŷŔśŶŽŃ
(2-stick, 18-channel, FASSTest-2.4GHz system)
Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band
System: FASSTest18CH, FASSTest12CH, FASST MULT, FASST 7CH, T-FHSS, S-FHSS, switchable
Power supply: 6.6V FT2F2100BV2 LiFe battery
Frequency band: 2.4GHz
RF power output : 100mW EIRPŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃŵŚœœśŶť
(FASSTest-2.4GHz system, Dual Antenna Diversity, S.BUS/S.BUS2 system)
Power requirement: 3.7V-7.4V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1)
Size: 0.98 x 1.86 x 0.56 in. (24.9 x 47.3 x 14.3 mm)
Weight: 0.38 oz. (10.9g)
Frequency band: 2.4GHz
RF power output: 25mW EIRP(*1) When using ESCs make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.

Note: The battery in the T18SZ transmitter does not arrive already attachedto the battery connector. Please connect the battery connector before use.

ŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŒŵƒƅƒƗŃƖƓƈƆƌƲƆƄƗƌƒƑƖ
Throttle stick warning
Ratchet type
（General transmitter）

The throttle stick doesn't
return neutrally.

Self neutral type（Multicopter/Robot speciﬁcation）

The throttle stick
returns neutrally by aspring.

WARNINGYou cannot use the self-neutral throttle stick for R/C airplanes, helicopters, and certain multi-copters.
Allowing the engine/motor to reach middle speed via automatic throttle stick return is very dangerous.
If using the T18SZ for R/C airplanes and helicopters, you must change the throttle stick to the ratchet type.

12 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŤƆƆƈƖƖƒƕƌƈƖ
Optional Parts

The following additional accessories are available from your dealer.
Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information:• FT2F2100B V2 transmitter battery pack - the (2,100mAh) transmitter LiFe battery pack may be easily
H[FKDJHGZLWKDIUHVKRQHWRSURYLGHHQRXJKFDSDFLW\IRUH[WHQGHGÀ\LQJVHVVLRQV
• Trainer cord - the optional training cord may be used to help a beginning pilot learn to fly easily byplacing the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the T18SZ transmitter may be connected to
DQRWKHU76=V\VWHPDVZHOODVWRDQ\RWKHUPRGHOVRI)XWDEDWUDQVPLWWHUV7KH76=WUDQVPLWWHUXVHVRQHRIWKHWKUHHFRUGSOXJW\SHVDFFRUGLQJWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHUFRQQHFWHG 5HIHUWRWKHGHVFULSWLRQDWWKH
75$,1(5IXQFWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQV 7KHSDUWQXPEHURIWKLVFRUGLV)870
• Servos - there are various kinds of servos. Please choose the Futaba servos that best suit your model and
SXUSRVH,I\RXXWLOL]HDQ6%86V\VWHP\RXVKRXOGFKRRVHDQ6%86VHUYR$QDQDORJVHUYRFDQQRWEH
used if "FASSTest12CH mode" is used.
• Telemetry sensor - please purchase an optional sensor, in order to utilize bidirectional communication
system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky.
>7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU6%677(@>$OWLWXGHVHQVRU6%6$@>530VHQVRU magnet type : SBS50@>530VHQVRU RSWLFDOW\SH6%652@>530VHQVRU EUXVKOHVVPRWRUW\SH6%65%@>*36
VHQVRU6%6*@>9ROWDJHVHQVRU6%69@>6%86VHUYRVHQVRU6%66@>&XUUHQWVHQVRU
6%6&@• Neckstrap - a neckstrap may be connected to your T18SZ system to make it easier to handle and improve\RXUÀ\LQJSUHFLVLRQVLQFH\RXUKDQGVZRQ¶WQHHGWRVXSSRUWWKHWUDQVPLWWHU¶VZHLJKW• Y-harnesses, servo extensions, hub,etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavyGXW\YHUVLRQZLWKKHDYLHUZLUHDUHDYDLODEOHWRDLGLQ\RXUODUJHUPRGHODQGRWKHULQVWDOODWLRQV• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros is available for your aircraft or helicopter needs.
*RYHUQRUIRUKHOLFRSWHUXVH$XWRPDWLFDOO\DGMXVWVWKURWWOHVHUYRSRVLWLRQWRPDLQWDLQDFRQVWDQWKHDG
VSHHGUHJDUGOHVVRIEODGHSLWFKORDGZHDWKHUHWF
5HFHLYHUVYDULRXVPRGHOVRI)XWDEDUHFHLYHUVPD\EHSXUFKDVHGIRUXVHLQRWKHUPRGHOV 5HFHLYHUVIRU
FASSTest and FASST, T-FHSS, S-FHSS types are available.)• SBD-2, S.BUS decoder -The SBD-2 is a converter for using conventional servos (other than an S.BUS
VHUYR ZLWKWKH6%866%86V\VWHP7KH6%'FRQQHFWVWRWKHUHFHLYHURXWSXWRIDQ6%866%86
system and eight servos can be used. SBD-2 can change the output CH by selecting from 9 groups using
DURWDU\VZLWFK6%'FDQXVH(;7EDWWHU\ IRUVHUYRV ＜ Before Use ＞ 13

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏƖ

● Monitor LED● Dial LD.RD● Antenna● Carrying handle● Switch
SA.SB.SE.SF● Switch
SC.SD.SG.SH● Slide lever
RS● Slide leverLS● Stick● Stick
ŭŖ

ŭŕ
ŭŗ

ŭŔ

● Power Switch● Digital
trim
T1-T6

● Hook● HOME/EXIT Button● Battery cover● U.MENU/MON. Button（User menu/Servo monitor）● Color LCD display Touch Panel

The panel displays shown in this manual may vary from your own,
depending upon your model type. Panel displays may also vary as aresult of version upgrades or other changes.

14 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŊƖŃƄƑƗƈƑƑƄ

$VZLWKDOOUDGLRIUHTXHQF\WUDQVPLVVLRQVWKHVWURQJHVWDUHDRIVLJQDOWUDQVPLVVLRQLVIURPWKHVLGHVRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHU VDQWHQQD$VVXFKWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGQRWEHSRLQWHGGLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXU
À\LQJVW\OHFUHDWHVWKLVVLWXDWLRQHDVLO\PRYHWKHDQWHQQDWRFRUUHFWWKLVVLWXDWLRQ

If you fly with yourtransmitter facing
the model at theangle shown in theillustration, bend theantenna 90 degrees.

Low power

High power

High power

Do not fly yourmodel with theantenna's tip
pointing in its
direction.

ŵƒƗƄƗƌƑƊŃƄƑƗƈƑƑƄ
The antenna can be rotated 180 degrees and angles
90 degrees. Forcing the antenna further than thiscan damage it. The antenna is not removable.

CAUTION
Please do not grasp the transmitter's
antenna during ﬂight.
■ Doing so may degrade the quality of the RFtransmission to the model.

Do not carry the transmitter by theantenna.
■ The antenna wire may break, making
operation impossible.

180°

Do not pull the antenna forcefully.
■ The antenna wire may break, making
operation impossible.

90°＜ Before Use ＞ 15

ŶƚƌƗƆƋŃŋŶŤŐŶūŌŃ

SF : 2 positions; Alternate;

SH : 2 positions; Momentary;Long leverLong lever

SE : 3 positions; Alternate;

SG : 3 positions; Alternate;

Short lever

Short lever

SA : 3 positions; Alternate;

SD : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever

Short lever

SB : 3 positions; Alternate;Long lever

SC : 3 positions; Alternate;Long lever*Self retum

2 positions

16 ＜ Before Use ＞

3 positions

Alternate

MomentaryŹƒƏƘƐƈ
7KH YROXPH /' DQG 5' NQREV DOORZ
analog input.

LD

7KH76=WUDQVPLWWHUEHHSVZKHQWKHYROXPH
knob reaches the center position.
*You can use each setting screen of the mixing
functions to select volumes and define thedirection of movement.

RDŶƏƌƇƈŃůƈƙƈƕ

LS

RSůŶŃŋůƈƉƗŌŏŃŵŶŃŋŵƌƊƋƗŌŝ
7KH/LQHDU6OLGHU/6DQG56RIIHUDQDORJLQSXW
7KH76=WUDQVPLWWHUEHHSVZKHQWKHOHYHUFRPHVWRWKHFHQWHU*You can select a slide lever and set the movement direction on the setting screen of mixing functions.

＜ Before Use ＞ 17

ŧƌƊƌƗƄƏŃŷƕƌƐƖŃŷŔŐŷř
7KLVWUDQVPLWWHULVHTXLSSHGZLWKGLJLWDOWULPV(DFKWLPH\RXSUHVVDWULPEXWWRQWKHWULPSRVLWLRQPRYHVRQHVWHS,I\RXFRQWLQXHSUHVVLQJLWWKHWULPSRVLWLRQVWDUWVWRPRYHIDVWHU,QDGGLWLRQZKHQ
WKHWULPSRVLWLRQUHWXUQVWRWKHFHQWHUWKHWRQHZLOOFKDQJH<RXFDQDOZD\VPRQLWRUWULPSRVLWLRQVE\referencing the LCD screen.

T4

T6

T5

T3

T2

*You can select the trim step amount and the display unit
RQWKHKRPHVFUHHQRQWKH77VHWWLQJVFUHHQZLWKLQWKH
linkage menu.
1RWH7KHWULPSRVLWLRQV\RXKDYHVHWZLOOEHVWRUHGLQWKH
QRQYRODWLOHPHPRU\DQGZLOOUHPDLQWKHUH

7KH XSSHU GLJLWDO WULPPHUV 7 DQG 7 RIIHU
analog input.

T1*You can select a slide lever and set the movement direction
on the setting screen of mixing functions.

ŧƌƊƌƗƄƏŃƗƕƌƐŃƒƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƄƏŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2◆When the airplane goes up while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆When the airplane dives while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆Elevator trim to up◆Elevator trim to down
Elevator Neutral

Elevator Neutral

Elevator Down

Elevator Up◆Adjust so that the airplane ﬂies level.

18 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃůƌũƈŃťƄƗƗƈƕƜŃũŷŕũŕŔœœťŃŹŕ
ŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃũŷŕũŕŔœœťŃŹŕ
This 2P connector connects
to the transmitter.

① A side battery coveris opened.

FT2F2100B V2LiFe Battery

The balance charge connector is not connected
when the battery is installed in the transmitter.
*This connector is used when charging with
the LBC-4E5, which is sold separately.

④ Connect the battery
connector.

Battery coverSponge tape
② Stick the sponge
tape to the side of
the battery.

FT2F2100B V2LiFe Battery⑤ Close the battery cover completely.

③ Install thebattery into thetransmitter.

＜ Before Use ＞ 19ŦƋƄƕƊƌƑƊŃƄƑŃůƌũƈŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜ

ťƄƗƗƈƕƜŃƕƈƐƒƙƄƏ
AC

Note: If you remove the battery while thepower is on, the data you have set will not
be saved.
1. Open the battery cover.
2. Disconnect the battery connector.
3. Close the battery cover completely.

To transmittercharging jackCharger

1.Plug the transmitter cord of the special
charger into the charging jack on the side of
the transmitter.
2. Plug the charger into an AC outlet.
3. Check that the charging LED lights.

ŦƋƄƕƊƌƑƊWARNINGBe careful not to drop the battery.
Never disconnect the battery connector
from the T18SZ transmitter after
turning off the power until the screen
is completely blank and the transmitterhas shut down completely.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.
* If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error"
will be shown the next time when you turn on the
power of the transmitter. Do not use the transmitter
as it is. Send it to the Futaba service center.

ŵƈƇŃƖƒƏƌƇ
ƒƕŵƈƇŃƅƏƌƑƎWARNING
Never plug the charger into an outlet
other than the indicated voltage.

ŦƋƄƕƊƈŃƆƒƐƓƏƈƗƌƒƑ*Plugging the charger into the wrong outlet could
result in an explosion or ﬁre.

Do not plug and unplug the charger
when your hands are wet.
*It may cause an electric shock.

ŪƕƈƈƑŃƖƒƏƌƇ
4. Disconnect the charge plug.
5. Disconnect the AC plug.
7KHFKDUJLQJWLPHZKHQFKDUJLQJWKH)7)%9
EDWWHU\ ZLWK WKH RSWLRQDO VSHFLDO FKDUJHU LV DSSUR[Lmately 3 hours.
:KHQWKHEDWWHU\ZLOOQRWEHXVHGIRUDORQJWLPHWR
SUHYHQWLWIURPGHWHULRUDWLQJZHUHFRPPHQGWKDWLWEH
kept in about the half capacity state instead of fully
charged. Also be careful that the battery does not enter the over-discharged state due to self-discharge.
:KHQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUZLOOQRWEHXVHGIRUDORQJWLPH
\RXVKRXOGDOZD\VUHPRYHLWVEDWWHU\Periodically (about every 3 months) charge the battery.

20 ＜ Before Use ＞

Do not overcharge/overdischarge thebattery.
*Overcharging/Overdischarging a battery can result inburns, ﬁre, injuries, or loss of sight due to overheating, breakage, or electrolyte leakage.

CAUTION
When the charger is not in use,
disconnect it from the AC outlet.
* Do this to prevent accidents and to avoid overheating.

ūƒƚŃƗƒŃƗƘƕƑŃƗƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃƓƒƚƈƕŃŲűŒŲũũŃ

:KHQ WXUQLQJ RQ WKH SRZHU WKH76= WUDQVPLWWHU ZLOO EHJLQ HPLWWLQJ 5) DXWRPDWLFDOO\ DIWHU LW
FRQ¿UPVWKHVXUURXQGLQJ5)FRQGLWLRQV7KHVWDWXVRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVGLVSOD\HGE\/('DWWKHXSSHU
part of the front of a T18SZ.
,I7+5VWLFNLVKLJKD:$51,1*VFUHHQZLOODSSHDU$QRWKHUZDUQLQJZLOODSSHDULIDSRZHUVXSSO\LVDWWDFKHG ,Q0XOWLFRSWHUPRGHWKH7+5SRVLWLRQDODUPZLOOQRWDSSHDUųƒƚƈƕŃŲű

ųƒƚƈƕŃŲũũ
Power Switch

Throttle Stick Low

Right or Left Long PushŬƉŃƗƋƈŃŅŷƋƕŃƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑŅŃƄƏƄƕƐŃƇƌƖƓƏƄƜƖ
,IWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLVLQWKHKLJKSRVLWLRQZKHQWKH
SRZHULVWXUQHG21

Warning alarm

Power Switch

Right and Left PushPower Switch

orRight or Left Long Push

:KHQWKHDODUPDFWLYDWHVORZHUWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNEHIRUHWXUQLQJWKHUHFHLYHUSRZHU21
,IWKHSRZHULVWXUQHG21ZKHQWKHLGOHXSDLUEUDNH
HWFVZLWFKHVDUH21WKHDERYHZDUQLQJZLOOGLVSOD\(QVXUHWKHUHOHYDQWVZLWFKHVDUHWXUQHG2))

Tap this to stop the alarmand RF signal. Only panel
screen operation is active, thetransmitter will not link to any
receiver.

If the power switches are turned oﬀ in the opposite order the model may unexpectedly run out of control andcause a very dangerous situation.

ŷƘƕƑƌƑƊŃƒƑŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƈƖ
1. Turn on the transmitter power switch.
2. Turn on the receiver or speed control power switch.

ONONŷƘƕƑƌƑƊŃƒȭŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƈƖ
Always be sure the motor/engine is stopped.
1. Turn oﬀ the receiver or speed control power switch.
2. Then turn oﬀ the transmitter power switch.

OFF

OFF

＜ Before Use ＞ 21

ŷƒƘƆƋŃųƄƑƈƏ

Tapping the settings buttons foreach value on the settings screen
will cause value input buttons toappear at the top of the panel.

7DS WKH SDQHOZLWK \RXU ILQJHU WR HQWHUdata.
3ODVWLF¿OPLVDWWDFKHGWRWKH7RXFK3DQHO3OHDVH
be careful so that you don't scratch the Touch Panel
ZLWKDQ\WKLQJKDUGVXFKDVDPHWDOREMHFW'RQ W
SXVKWKH7RXFK3DQHOZLWKH[FHVVLYHIRUFHRUGURSanything on the panel.
$OWKRXJK\RXPD\¿QGVRPHDLUEXEEOHVXQGHUWKH
plastic panel due to environmental changes such
DVWHPSHUDWXUHLWLVQRWDGHIHFWDQGZLOOFDXVHQR
problems.
&RORU /(' LV PDGH IURP PDQ\ SL[HOV 6RPH
pixels hold lighting. Moreover, some pixels go out.
And a screen may flicker. Such condition is the
FKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIFRORU/(',WLVQRWIDLOXUH

Pressing and holding a value will
return it to its default setting.
Value input buttons display at the
top of the panel.

Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in valueūŲŰŨŒŨŻŬŷŃƄƑƇŃŸőŰŨűŸŒŰŲűőŃ
HOME/EXIT
Press

Return to the previous
screenPress and hold

Return to the home screen

Press from HOME
screen.

To Telemetry display

Press and hold fromHOME screen.

Panel lock / Lock release

U.MENU/MON.
HOME/EXIT

U.MENU/MON.

Press

To user menu display

ButtonButtonPress and holdTo servo monitor display

22 ＜ Before Use ＞

ųƄƑƈƏŃƏƒƆƎ
Temporarily activating this function makes it impossible to change data by mistakenly touching keys
GXULQJÀLJKWHow to lock
1. The home screen is displayed.
2. Press the HOME/EXIT button for about 1
second. "Key mark" is displayed and thekeys disabled.

ŃůƒƆƎŃŧƌƖƓƏƄƜ

Panel lock
HOME/EXIT Press and holdHow to unlock
1. Press the Home/Exit button for about 1
second, and the panel will then become
unlocked.

CAUTION
The T18SZ's touch screen is very sensitive. To
avoid accidentally activating it during a flight, it
is suggested that it be locked. Due to the touch
screen's sensitivity, allowing it to be touchedduring flight by a neck strap hook, servo extension,or even your hand could be dangerous. Please use
the Touch Panel lock for added safety during flight.

Panel unlock

HOME/EXIT Press and holdŵũŃƒȭŃƐƒƇƈ

0RGHORSHUDWLRQLVQRWSRVVLEOHEXWSDQHORSHUDWLRQZLWKRXW5)VLJQDOWUDQVPLVVLRQLVDOORZHG
5HGXFHVEDWWHU\SRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQGXULQJVHWXS"RF oﬀ" Model
operation is notpossible, but only
panel operation is.
U.MENU/MON.
Press andRestart the power
to transmit RF
signals.

Power ON

＜ Before Use ＞ 23

ŰƒƑƌƗƒƕŃůŨŧŃƇƌƖƓƏƄƜ

7KHVWDWXVRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVGLVSOD\HGE\/('DWWKHXSSHUSDUWRIWKHIURQWRID76=

)A66Test mode ń Light %lue light)A66T mode ń *reen lightT)H66/6)H66 mode ń <ellowgreen light5)O)) ń 9iolet light
6tarting ń 5ed light
Trainer 6tudent ń %lue light
5ange check mode ń 6low blinking
5eceiver link mode ń )ast blinking

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏ*Example Stick Mode2(OHYDWRU6WLFN
3LWFKD[LV$LOHURQVWLFN

5ROOD[LV(QJLQH PRWRU
3RZHU

7KURWWOHVWLFN

24 ＜ Before Use ＞<DZD[LV

5XGGHUVWLFNŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll
Nose UpThe right aileronis up.

The left aileronis down.

Elevator stick

Aileron stickUP

To the right
Level ﬂight(moved to the bottom)

Elevator isup.

Level ﬂight

NeutralNeutralElevator is
down.

Left roll

The left aileronis up.

The right
aileron is
down.

Aileron stickElevator stick

Nose Down

DOWN

To the left

(moved to the top)

Yaw Axis Control

Throttle Control

High throttle
Nose Right
Throttle stick

Rudder stick

HIGHT

To the rightA rudder isright.

(moved to the top)

MiddleThrottle stick
NeutralStraight

Nose Left

A rudder isleft.

Rudder stick
To the left

MIDDLE(neutral)

Low throttle

Throttle stick
SLOW(moved to the bottom)＜ Before Use ＞ 25

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control

Right roll

Nose Up

Elevator stick

Aileron stickUP

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Level ﬂight
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralAileron stickElevator stick

Left roll

Nose Down

To the left

Nose Right

DOWN(moved to the top)

Yaw Axis Control

Throttle /Pitch Control

Rudder stickThrottle stick
Rise
HIGHT

To the right

Pitch UpHigh

(moved to the top)

Hovering
Throttle stick
NeutralMIDDLE
MiddleStraight(neutral)

Descent
Pitch Down

Rudder stick
Nose Left

26 ＜ Before Use ＞

Throttle stick

To the left
Slow

SLOW
(moved to the bottom)

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll

Nose Up

Right slide

Elevator stick

Aileron stick

Hovering
Level ﬂight

UP

Back slide

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Hovering
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralLeft roll
Nose Down
Left slide
Aileron stick

Front slide

Elevator stick
DOWN

To the left

(moved to the top)

Throttle Control

Yaw Axis Control
Nose Right

Rudder stickThrottle stick
Rise
HIGH

To the right(moved to the top)

Hovering

Hovering
Level ﬂight

Throttle stick
NeutralMIDDLE(neutral)

Descent

Throttle stick

Rudder stick
Nose Left

To the left

Stop

SLOW
(moved to the bottom)＜ Before Use ＞ 27

ŶƗƌƆƎŃŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃ
ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃ
ƏƈƑƊƗƋ

<RXFDQDGMXVWWKHOHQJWKRIVWLFNOHYHUVDV\RX
OLNH,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWRDGMXVWWKHOHQJWKRIWKH
VWLFNVLQOLQHZLWK\RXUKDQGVL]HLever headA

Lever head
B
Side cover

1. Hold the lever head "%" and turn the leverhead "A" counter-clockwise. The lock will be
released.
2. Turn the lever-head "A" clockwise as you holdthe lever-head "%" after placing it as you like.

3. Using your hand remove the transmitter's rearrubber grips.
*It is diﬃcult to remove rear grips from the central
site of a transmitter.
Therefore, remove from the outside of rear grips.

ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃ
ƗƈƑƖƌƒƑ

It removes
from here

You can adjust how quickly the
stick returns to neutral.

Rear Grip
Rear Grip

4. Use a 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to adjust
the spring strength as you prefer by turning
the adjusting screw of the stick you want toadjust.
7XUQLQJWKHVFUHZFORFNZLVHLQFUHDVHVWKHWHQVLRQThe tension of the self-return type stick lever can
EHDGMXVWHG
1. First, remove the battery cover on thebottom of the transmitter. Next, unplug thebattery wire and remove the battery fromthe transmitter.
2. Next, using a hand, remove the transmitter'sside cover (rubber). When using Mode 2, youwill need to remove the side cover to expose
the tension screw.

28 ＜ Before Use ＞

CAUTION: Loosening the screw too much
can interfere with the internal stick operation.

•Stick Tension (J4)
(Mode 1/2)
•Stick Tension (J1)
(Mode 1/2)

ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃ
ƄƑƊƏƈ

<RXFDQPDNHILQHDGMXVWPHQWVWRWKHDQJOHRIDVWLFNOHYHUHLWKHULQZDUGVRURXWZDUGVIURPWKH
center stick position.

1.5mm hexagonal wrench•Stick Tension (J3)
(Mode 1)
•Stick Tension (J2)
(Mode 2)1.5mm hexagonal wrench
Turn screw counter-clockwise.
Turn screw clockwise.

Stick tension minimum
Stick tension maximum

5. At the end of adjustment, re-install the side
cover and rear grips.

8VH WKH DWWDFKHG PP KH[DJRQDO ZUHQFKLQVLGHVW\OXV WRWXUQWKHVFUHZFORFNZLVHWRDGMXVWWKHVWLFNRXWZDUGVRUFRXQWHUFORFNZLVHWRWLOWLWLQZDUG
1RWH%HFDUHIXOQRWWRWXUQWKHVFUHZWRRIDUFRXQWHUFORFNZLVHDVLWFRXOGIDOORXW＜ Before Use ＞ 29ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃŶƗƌƆƎŃŋŵƄƗƆƋƈƗŃŶƜƖƗƈƐŌ
You can choose either airplane ratchet system or helicopter-touch.
7KLVWUDQVPLWWHUKDVWZRUDWFKHWSODWHVRQHIRU
DLUSODQH DQG WKH RWKHU RQH IRU KHOLFRSWHU ,I
\RXWLJKWHQERWKVFUHZV\RXZRQ WEHDEOHWRDFKLHYHWKHDGMXVWPHQWWKDW\RXQHHGEHFDXVHRIWKHRYHUODSRIWKRVHWZRDGMXVWPHQWVƔ5HWDLQLQJ)RUFH - 0RGHƔ5HWDLQLQJ)RUFH -
0RGH

,I\RXZDQWWRFKDQJHWKHVHWWLQJIURPDLUSODQH
to helicopter (or from helicopter to airplane),
WXUQ WKH UDWFKHW VFUHZ FORFNZLVH XQWLO WKHWKURWWOHVWLFNPRYHVIUHHO\7KHQWXUQWKHVFUHZ
for the helicopter until you get the tension you
like.

Airplane,QWKH0RGHDUUDQJHPHQWRIDVFUHZLVRSSRVLWH

>$GMXVWPHQWRIWHQVLRQ@
1. Open the dust protection cap on the back of thetransmitter that is covering the hole for throttle stick
adjustment.
2. Use the attached 1.5mm hexagonal wrench (inside
stylus) to turn the adjustment screw and set it as you
prefer. Turning the screw clockwise increases thetension.
For airplanes: Adjust the screw on the left.
For helicopters: Adjust the screw on the right.
In changing the setting from airplane to helicopter (orheli to airplane);
1. Turn the screw counter-clockwise until the throttle
stick moves freely, and turn the screw clockwise toadjust it to the tension you prefer.

30 ＜ Before Use ＞

HelicopterŶŧŃŦƄƕƇŃŋƖƈƆƘƕƈŃƇƌƊƌƗƄƏŃƐƈƐƒƕƜŃƆƄƕƇŌŃŋƑƒƗŃƌƑƆƏƘƇƈƇŌ
The T18SZ transmitter model data can be stored by using any commonly found SD card. When76=WUDQVPLWWHUXSGDWHVRIWZDUHLVUHOHDVHGWKHVRIWZDUHLVXSGDWHGXVLQJDQ6'FDUG7KH76=LV
capable of using SD and SDHC cards (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB).

ŶŧŃƆƄƕƇŃƕƈƄƇƈƕŒƚƕƌƗƈƕ
Saving model data and update
files (released from Futaba) into the
SD card, you can use those files on\RXU76= WUDQVPLWWHU (TXLSPHQW
IRU UHDGLQJ DQG ZULWLQJ 6' FDUGV LV
available at most electronics stores.

SD card slot

②The SD card slot
ot isshown here inn theeﬁgure below.

ŶƗƒƕƈƇŃƇƄƗƄ
When you have a problem of saving or reading
GDWDDIWHUDORQJSHULRGRIXVHSOHDVHJHWDQHZ6'
card.

*Pay attention to thehee proppr
properroper
er oorientationrien
ri
ienttati
tati
tion
on o
off
h
the SD card, as shown here.

*We are not responsible for, and offer no compensation for,memory card data that fails or is damaged for any reason.
Be sure to keep a backup of all important data stored in yourSD card.

ŬƑƖƈƕƗƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃŶŧŃƆƄƕƇ
③ When the SD cardis pressed in once
again, the card will
be released from thecard slot and can beremoved.

① The side battery coveris removable.

CAUTIONBe sure to turn off the power tothe transmitter before inserting or
removing the SD card.
As the SD card is a precision device, do
not use excessive force when inserting.

Battery cover-When an SD card is installed in the T18SZ transmitter, a folder called "Futaba" is created. Folders
FDOOHG /2* DQG 02'(/ DUH FUHDWHG LQ WKLVIROGHU7KH02'(/IROGHUVWRUHVWKHPRGHOGDWD
DQGWKH/2*IROGHUVWRUHVWKHWHOHPHWU\ORJGDWD
-The telemetry log data recorded on the SD card
can be converted to CSV format by the telemeterlog converter released on our home page. WhenFRS\LQJ RU PRYLQJ D ORJ ILOH DOZD\V VHOHFW ERWK)/,DQG)/'¿OH

SD card slot

＜ Before Use ＞ 31

ŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŒųƏƘƊ
ŶőťŸŶŃƆƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃŋŶőŬŒũŌ
When using an S.BUS servo and telemetry
sensor, connect them both here.

ŨƄƕƓƋƒƑƈŃƓƏƘƊ

Earphone
Plug

Connecting a stereo headphone to this plug, thespeech information of telemetry can be heard.
ChargePlugŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃƉƒƕŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜŃƆƋƄƕƊƈƕ
This is the connector for charging the LiFe
battery FT2F2100BV2 that is installed in thetransmitter. Do not use any other chargers except
the attached special charger corresponding to LiFe
battery.

WARNING
Do not connect any other chargers
except the special charger to thischarging connector.
Rubber coverTrainerConnector

S.BUS (S.I/F)
ConnectorŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃƉƒƕŃƗƕƄƌƑƈƕŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑ
When you use the trainer function, connect the
RSWLRQDOWUDLQHUFDEOHEHWZHHQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUVIRU
teacher and student.
*You can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen in the System menu.

32 ＜ Before Use ＞*If you take out the LiFe battery FT2F2100BV2 fromthe transmitter, you can use the optional balancecharger LBC-4E5 corresponding to LiFe battery.

ŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃƑƒƐƈƑƆƏƄƗƘƕƈ
Before using the receiver, be sure to read the
SUHFDXWLRQVOLVWHGLQWKHIROORZLQJSDJHVŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃŵŚœœśŶťDANGER
Don't attach a connector as shown in
the preceding illustration.
*It will short-circuit if connected in this way. A
short circuit across the battery terminals may
cause abnormal heating, ﬁre and burns.

WARNING
S.BUS2 connectors
Don't connect an S.BUS servo / gyro
to S.BUS2 connector.

Connector"1 through 6": outputs for the channels 1
through 6
%RXWSXWVRIFKDQQHOVDQGSRZHU
"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.
[S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro ]*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set&+02'(RIWKHIROORZLQJSDJHWRPRGH%RU
mode D.
"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.
[S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry Sensor ]*When using 9 or more channels, use an S.BUS
IXQFWLRQ RU XVH D VHFRQG 56% DQG OLQN
both to your transmitter.
&*< 6%86 *\UR  VKRXOG 127 EH
connected to the S.BUS2 ports on any receiver.

Connector insertion

LED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of
the receiver.

Link/Mode Switch
8VH WKH VPDOO SODVWLF VFUHZ GULYHU WKDW ZDVLQFOXGHGZLWK\RXUUHFHLYHU
7KH/LQN0RGH6ZLWFKLVDOVRXVHGIRUWKH&+
mode selection.

＋

Firmly insert the connector in the direction
VKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH,QVHUWWKH6%86E\WXUQLQJ
it 90 degrees.

DANGER
5HFHLYHU

Do not connect either a switch
or battery in this manner.

−
Extra Voltage Connector
8VH WKLV FRQQHFWRU ZKHQ XVLQJ D YROWDJH
telemetry device to send the battery voltage (DC0a9 IURPWKHUHFHLYHUWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
<RXZLOOQHHGWRSXUFKDVHWKHRSWLRQDO([WHUQDO
9ROWDJHLQSXWFDEOH &$59,1 )870
<RX FDQ WKHQ PDNH D FDEOH ZLWK DQ H[WUD
FRQQHFWRUWRWKH([WHUQDOYROWDJHFRQQHFWRU
＜ Before Use ＞ 33

DANGER
Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.

Do not short-circuit the battery
terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may
cause abnormal heating, ﬁre and burns.

Please double check your polarity( ＋ and − ) when hooking up yourconnectors.
* If ＋ and − of wiring are mistaken, it will damage,ignite and explode.

>+RZWRFKDQJHWKH56%&KDQQHOPRGH@
1. Press and hold down the Link/Mode buttonon the 56% receiver.
2. Turn the receiver on while holding down
the Link/Mode button. When the LED
begins to blink green/red the button may
be released.
3. The LED should now be blinking red in oneof the patterns described by the chart
below.
4. Each press of the Mode/Link button
advances the receiver to the next mode.
5. When you reach the mode that you wish
to operate in, press and hold the Mode/
Link button for more than 2 seconds.
6. Once locked into the correct mode the
LED will change to a solid color.
7. Please cycle the receiver(s) power off andback on again after changing the Channel
Mode.

Don't connect to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.

ŵŚœœśŶť ŦūŃŰƒƇƈ

7KH 56% UHFHLYHU LV D YHU\ YHUVDWLOH
XQLW,WKDV3:0RXWSXWV6%86DQG6%86
outputs. Additionally the PWM outputs can be
FKDQJHGIURPFKDQQHOVWRFKDQQHOV,I
you only desire to use it as an 8 channel receiverZLWKRXW 6%86  LW FDQ EH XVHG ZLWKRXW DQ\setting changes.
7KH 76= KDV WKH DELOLW\ WR OLQN WR WZR
56% UHFHLYHUV  2QH RI WKHP RXWSXWWLQJ
channels 1-8 and the other outputting channels
JLYHV\RX3:0FKDQQHOV,QVWUXFWLRQVfor this configuration and S.BUS operation
IROORZ

R7008SB CH MODE TABLE
Receiverconnector

Setting channel
Mode A
1-8CH

Mode B
1-7CH

Mode C
9-16CH

Mode D
9-15CH

1

1

1

9

9

2

2

2

10

10

3

3

3

11

11

4

4

4

12

12

5

5

5

13

13

6

6

6

14

14

7/B

7

7

15

15

8/SB

8

S.BUS

16

S.BUS

Red LED blink

1 time2 times

3 times

4 times

Default

34 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŊƖŃŤƑƗƈƑƑƄŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƄƗƌƒƑ

7KH56%KDVWZRDQWHQQDV,QRUGHUWRPD[LPL]HVLJQDOUHFHSWLRQDQGSURPRWHVDIHPRGHOLQJ)XWDEDKDVDGRSWHGDGLYHUVLW\DQWHQQDV\VWHP7KLVDOORZVWKHUHFHLYHUWRREWDLQ5)VLJQDOVRQERWKDQWHQQDVDQGÀ\SUREOHPIUHH
*Must be kept as straight as possible.

Antenna

Coaxial cable
R7008SB Receiver

To obtain the best results of the diversity
I X Q F W L R Q   S O H D V H  U H I H U  W R  W K H  I R O O R Z L Q Jinstructions:
1. The two antennas must be kept as straightas possible. Otherwise it will reduce theeffective range.
2. The two antennas should be placed at 90
degrees to each other.

AntennaThis is not a critical figure, but the mostimportant thing is to keep the antennas
away from each other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal
objects that can weaken the RF signal. In
this case the antennas should be placedat both sides of the model. Then the best
RF signal condition is obtained at any Áying
attitude.
3. The antennas must be kept away fromconductive materials, such as metal,
carbon and fuel tank, by at least half aninch. The coaxial part of the antennas does
not need to follow these guidelines, but do
not bend it in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.

Antenna

7KHWZRDQWHQQDVVKRXOGEHSODFHGDWGHJUHHVWRHDFKRWKHU
7KHLOOXVWUDWLRQGHPRQVWUDWHVKRZWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGEHSODFHG
5HFHLYHU9LEUDWLRQDQG:DWHUSURRILQJ7KHUHFHLYHUFRQWDLQVSUHFLVLRQHOHFWURQLFSDUWV%HVXUHWRDYRLGYLEUDWLRQVKRFN DQG WHPSHUDWXUH H[WUHPHV )RU SURWHFWLRQ ZUDS WKH UHFHLYHU LQ IRDP UXEEHU RU RWKHU YLEUDWLRQDEVRUELQJPDWHULDOV,WLVDOVRDJRRGLGHDWRZDWHUSURRIWKHUHFHLYHUE\SODFLQJLWLQDSODVWLFEDJDQGVHFXULQJWKHRSHQHQGRIWKH
EDJZLWKDUXEEHUEDQGEHIRUHZUDSSLQJLWZLWKIRDPUXEEHU,I\RXDFFLGHQWDOO\JHWPRLVWXUHRUIXHOLQVLGHWKHUHFHLYHU
\RXPD\H[SHULHQFHLQWHUPLWWHQWRSHUDWLRQRUDFUDVK,ILQGRXEWUHWXUQWKHUHFHLYHUWRRXUVHUYLFHFHQWHUIRUVHUYLFH

＜ Before Use ＞ 35

ŰƒƘƑƗƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃŶƈƕƙƒŃ
Wood screw

2.3-2.6mm nut
washerRubbergrommetBrass eyelet

RubbergrommetBrass eyelet

Servo mount
Servo mount2.3-2.6mm screw(Airplane/Glider)(Helicopter)ŶƄƉƈƗƜŃƓƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖŃƚƋƈƑŃ
ƜƒƘŃƌƑƖƗƄƏƏŃƕƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃƄƑƇŃ
ƖƈƕƙƒƖőWARNING
Connecting connectors
Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from vibration
and waterŶƈƕƙƒŃƏƈƄƇŃƚƌƕƈƖŃ
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
broken by vibration during flight, provide alittle slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.

Wrap the receiver with something
soft such as foam rubber to avoid
vibration. If there is a chance ofgetting wet, put the receiver in awaterproof bag or balloon.
Receiver's antenna
Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do
not bind the receiver's antenna withthe cables for servos.

Margin in the lead wire.

Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet sothat the lead wire is neatand secure.

ŰƒƘƑƗƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋŃ

:KHQ PRXQWLQJ D SRZHU VZLWFK WR DQ
airframe, make a rectangular hole that is a little
ODUJHU WKDQ WKH WRWDO VWURNH RI WKH VZLWFK VR
WKDW \RX FDQ WXUQ WKH VZLWFK 212)) ZLWKRXW
binding.
$YRLG PRXQWLQJ WKH VZLWFK ZKHUH LW FDQ EH
FRYHUHGE\HQJLQHRLODQGGXVW,QJHQHUDOLWLV
UHFRPPHQGHGWRPRXQWWKHSRZHUVZLWFKRQWKH
VLGHRIWKHIXVHODJHWKDWLVRSSRVLWHWKHPXIÀHU

Attached screwLess than 5 mm of
mounting plate

Switch cover

Switch36 ＜ Before Use ＞

Locate the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables,etc.
*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will
reduce the radio reception sensitivity and range,
and may cause a crash.

Servo throw
Adjust your system so that pushrods
will not bind or sag when operating
the servos to the full extent.
*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, the servo could be damaged due to force on
the gear train and/or power consumption causing
rapid battery drain.

Mounting servos
Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount.
And be sure that the servo cases do
not touch directly to the metal parts
such as servo mount.
*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly,
vibration will travel to and possibly damage theservo.

ŶőťŸŶŒŶőťŸŶŕŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƄƗƌƒƑ

7KLVVHWXVHVWKH6%866%86V\VWHP7KHZLULQJLVDVVLPSOL¿HGDQGFOHDQPRXQWLQJDVSRVVLEOH
HYHQZLWKPRGHOVWKDWXVHDODUJHQXPEHURIVHUYRV,QDGGLWLRQWKHZLQJVFDQEHTXLFNO\LQVWDOOHGWRWKHIXVHODJHZLWKRXWDQ\HUURQHRXVZLULQJE\WKHXVHRIRQO\RQHVLPSOHZLUHHYHQZKHQWKHUHDUHDODUJH
number of servos used.
Ɣ:KHQXVLQJ6%866%86VSHFLDOVHWWLQJVDQGPL[HVLQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUPD\EHXQQHFHVVDU\Ɣ7KH6%866%86VHUYRVPHPRUL]HWKHQXPEHURIFKDQQHOVWKHPVHOYHV VHWWDEOHZLWKWKH76=
Ɣ7KH6%866%86V\VWHPDQGFRQYHQWLRQDOV\VWHP UHFHLYHUFRQYHQWLRQDO&+XVHG FDQEHPL[HG

S.BUS

Glider usage example
Receiver: R7008SB
Servo: S3174SV×9 ( Optional )HUB×4 ( Optional )Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example

SwitchReceiver: R7008SB
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )HUB×3 ( Optional )Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )Elevator servo: BLS173SV×2 ( Optional )＜ Before Use ＞ 37

ŶőťŸŶŃźƌƕƌƑƊŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈ
*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you must set
the receiver to Mode B or Mode D. See ●S.BUS Servo
R7008SB CH MODE TABLE. Page 33
Since the channel number is memorized by the S.BUS itself, any
connector can be used. When the SBD-1, SBD-2 (sold separately)is used, ordinary servos can be used with the S.BUS system.
Receiver*SBD-1 S.BUS Decoders cannot be used by S.BUS2 port.

Optional Parts●6-Terminal box(TB16PP)Six connectors can beinserted%DWWHU\
6%86
3RUW
6%

+XE
‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬

6ZLWFK

7HUPLQDOER[
6%86([WHQVLRQ&DEOH

6ZLWFK+XE+XE●Hub（Another power
supply）
Used when using aseparate power supply
battery.
Orange%DWWHU\●Hub
Three connectors can beinserted.
Green

6%866HUYR

6%866HUYR●When separate power supply used

When a large number of servos are used or when highcurrent servos are used, the servos can be driven by aseparate power supply by using a separate Power
Supply 3-way hub with orange connector.

WARNING
Power supply

Please make sure that you use a battery that can deliver enough capacity forthe number and kind of servos used. Alkaline batteries cannot be used.

S.BUS Gyro CGY750
Connection example&+(OHYDWRU

6ZLWFK*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, youmust set the receiver to Mode B
or Mode D. See R7008SB CH
MODE TABLE.

Receiver&+$LOHURQ%DWWHU\

6%863RUW
6%

&+
7KURWWOH&+
5XGGHU&*<
*\UR
&+
3LWFK

38 ＜ Before Use ＞

ŶőťŸŶŕŃŶƜƖƗƈƐ
When using the S.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.

S.BUS2 TABLE
Receiver port

S.BUS Servo
S.BUS Gyro

S.BUS2 Servo
S.BUS2 Gyro

Telemetry sensor

S.BUS

○

○

×

S.BUS2

× （※）

○

○

（※）Don't connect S.BUS Servo, S.BUS
Gyro to S.BUS2 connector.

S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in thecorrect receiver ports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure
you connect to the correct one.

&+0RGHLVVHWWR0RGH%>'@

6%86
3RUW
6%
6%86
3RUW

+XE

+XE

6%866HUYR
6%86VHUYR&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
6%86J\UR&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

+XE

+XE

6%866HUYR

7HOHPHWU\
6HQVRU

6%86VHUYR&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

6%86
*<52
ٔ

5XGGHU6HUYR＜ Before Use ＞ 39ŶőťŸŶŒŶőťŸŶŕŃƇƈƙƌƆƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T18SZ. Channel setting andother data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.

76=

1. Connect the S.%US device you want to set
with as shown in the Àgure.
2. Turn on the transmitter power.
3. Call the setup screen.
Servo: System Menu → S.%US servo
Sensor: Linkage Menu → Sensor
4. Perform setting in accordance with eachscreen.
5. This sets the channel and other data for each
S.%US servo, or telemetry device to be usedwith the S.%US device or receiver.

,WLVQRWQHFHVVDU\WRFDUU\RXWPXOWLSOHEDWWHU\connections like a T18MZ/T14SG.

*When connecting many current-consuming
VHUYRV SOHDVH XVH DQ DGGLWLRQDO SRZHU VXSSO\hub.
 $QG HOHFWULF SRZHU LV VXSSOLHG WR D VHUYR ZLWKDQRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\+XE‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬
6ZLWFK+XE+XE

6%866%86
GHYLFH
6%866%86VHUYR%DWWHU\

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRUWARNING
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter power OFF
while S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor data is
being saved.
■ S.BUS servo and sensor save data will be lost,
resulting in malfunction.

6%866HUYR●When separate power supply used
When a large number of servos are used orwhen high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven using a separate Power Supply
3-way hub.

WARNING
Do not use the S.I/F (S.BUS servo setup) connector
with anything other than high-voltage-capable
S.BUS servos.
■ Transmitter battery voltage (6.6V) is conveyed
directly.
Us in g a n y t h i n g o t h e r t h an h i g h -v ol tag e capable servos presents the danger that they
will break.

40 ＜ Before Use ＞

Green

+XE
‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬Used when using a separate
power supply battery.

ŶƚƌƗƆƋŃƋƄƕƑƈƖƖ

7KLVVZLWFK(6:-FRQQHFWVD)XWDEDUHFHLYHUWRDEDWWHU\DQGLVWXUQHGRQDQGRIILQDQ)(7FLUFXLW&RPSDUHGWRXVLQJDPHFKDQLFDOVZLWFKLWDOORZVPRUHFXUUHQWWREHVHQWZLWKOHVVORVV

Receiver

Battery

The receiver power supply
can be connected to any
port.

＜ Attachment ＞

Attached screwLess than 5 mm of
mounting plate

Switch coverUse the mounting plate from the receiver on/
RIIVZLWFKDVDWHPSODWHIRUWKHFXWRXWDQGVFUHZKROHV0RXQWWKHVZLWFKRQWKHVLGHRIWKHIXVHODJHRSSRVLWHWKHHQJLQHH[KDXVWDQGZKHUHLWZRQ¶W
be inadvertently turned on or off during handling
RUVWRUDJH%HFHUWDLQWKHVZLWFKPRYHVZLWKRXWUHVWULFWLRQDQG³VQDSV´IURP21WR2))DQGWKDWWKHFXWRXWDOORZVIXOOPRWLRQRIWKHVZLWFKLQERWK
directions.

SwitchWhen the switch is OFF there
is a small amount of current
flowing through it. This will
damage the battery and or
switch so please disconnect
the battery when not being
used for long periods of time.

Do not charge thereceiver batteries
through the electronic
switch. Disconnect
the battery from theswitch and charge to the
manufacturer's directions.

ųƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖŃWARNING
When the model is not being used, always remove
or disconnect the battery.
■ When the switch is off, a slight amount of
current still flows. Unless the switch and battery
are disconnected, the battery will be damaged
from excessive discharge.
Always make sure that the switch harness is ﬁrmly
attached to the fuselage of the model.
■ There is the danger of loss of control andcrashing if the connector is disconnected byvibration and shock.
Do not charge the receiver battery through theswitch harness. Disconnect the receiver battery
and charge to the manufacturer's instructions.
■ There is no charge connector in this switch.
Never reverse the battery polarity.
■ Reverse connection will immediately destroy
the receiver, servo, etc.

Ensure that the unit is mounted in an area that will
eliminate exposure to fuel, water and vibration.
■ As with any electronic components, proper
precautions are urged to prolong the life andincrease the performance of the ESW-1J.
Allow a slight amount of slack in the cables andfasten them at a suitable location to prevent any
damage from vibration during ﬂight.
Never solder the ESW-1J or attempt to repair,deform, modify or disassemble them.
Do not use the ESW-1J with anything other than an
R/C model.
Futaba Corp. will not be responsible for damage
caused by combination with other than genuine
Futaba parts.

＜ Before Use ＞ 41

BASIC OPERATION
ūƒƐƈŃƖƆƕƈƈƑ
This is the Home screen and descriptions of its menus. Use your finger to operate the touch
screen.
Battery voltage for receivers

Condition nameBattery Indicator• In FASSTest/T-FHSS mode, it isdisplayed. Receiver voltage
and Ext voltage display• The condition namethat is currently used
is displayed here.

• When the battery voltage
reaches 6.1V(LiFe), the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.

→ (Menu)• ModelTap the button to call Model
Menu screen.

System mode
• System(FASSTest18CH etc.)
mode is displayed here.

The reception of the signal from thereceiver to the transmitter is shown.
• This does not affect Áight.

Timer1, Timer2• Timer is displayed here.
Tap the time button to start/stop thetimer. (When the screen is tapped for
1 second, timer is reset to the initialvalue.)RF Indicator
Model Name

Date and Time

User's name

• The model name thatis currently used isdisplayed here.

→ (Menu)• System• Linkage• Model selectTap the button to call each Menu
screen.

System timer• This shows the accumulated timesince the latest reset. (Each model /Total)(Hour):(Minute):(Second)

Digital trim (T1 to T6)• Trim position is displayed
here.

WARNINGBe sure to conﬁrm the model name before ﬂying your aircraft.
Check the battery voltage as often as possible and try to charge the battery earlier.
If the battery alarm makes a sound, land your aircraft immediately.
*You can adjust the LCD contrast by the display setting in the system menu.

42 ＜ Basic Operation ＞

ŃůƌƑƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈŃŋŷŔśŶŽŒŵŚœœśŶťŌ
Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order to start operation, the receivermust be linked with the ID code of the transmitter to which it is being paired. Once the link is made,the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be usedwith another transmitter. When you purchase additional R7008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary;otherwise the receiver will not work.

ůƌƑƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close
to each other within half (0.5m) meter.

6.[Link] is tapped. The transmitter will emit achime as it starts the linking process.

Less than 0.5 m

2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [System type] at the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by tapping the screen.

7. When the transmitter starts to chime, poweron the receiver. The receiver should link to
the transmitter within about 1 second.

4. When you use two receivers on one model,
you must change from [Single] to [Dual].
*Only two receivers can be used. In"Dual", two setting items come out. Input,
respectively.
ID of a primary
receiver displays.

ID of a secondary
receiver displays.

In "Link" Mode

Receiver ON
In Dual, a primary receiver (Rx1) islinked first. Next, a secondary (Rx2)
receiver is linked.
5. Battery fail-safe voltage can be changed
from the initial value of 3.8V here.
* Only in FASSTest/T-FHSS Mode.

8. If linking fails, an error message is displayed.
Bring the transmitter closer to the receiverand repeat the procedure above from Step 2.

＜ Basic Operation ＞ 43

9. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.
It is INH when not using it.

*Telemetry function cannot be used for the 2ndreceiver. → FASSTest18CH*Telemetry function cannot be used for the dual
receiver. → T-FHSS, FASSTest12CH*You must link one receiver at a time. If both
power supplies to the receivers are switched on
simultaneously, data is received incorrectly by
the transmitter.
*You cannot link three receivers.
*Link is required when a system type ischanged.

10. When a telemetry function is enabled,
the receiving interval (down-link interval)of sensor data can be changed. If a D/
L interval is increased, the response of thesensor data display becomes slower, butstick response will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s*Linking is required whenever a new model is
made.

WARNING
After the linking is done, please cycle
receiver power and check that thereceiver to be linked is really under thecontrol of the transmitter.
Do not perform the linking procedure
with motor's main wire connected orwith the engine operating as it may
result in serious injury.

*If there are many FASSTest (T-FHSS) systems
turned on around your receiver, it might notlink to your transmitter. In this case, even if thereceiver's LED stays solid green, unfortunately
the receiver might have established a link
to one of other transmitters. This is very
dangerous if you do not notice this situation.
In order to avoid the problem, we strongly
recommend you to double check whether
your receiver is really under control by yourtransmitter by giving the stick input and thenchecking the servo response.

ŤƉƗƈƕŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

*Do not perform the linking operation when
the drive motor is connected or the engine isrunning.
*When you use two receivers, please be sure to
setup a "Rx1" and "Rx2" in the "dual" mode.

44 ＜ Basic Operation ＞

After setting, press a HOME/EXIT buttonŬƉŃƗƋƈŃƕƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŊƖŃƙƒƏƗƄƊƈŃƇƒƈƖŃƑƒƗŃƇƌƖƓƏƄƜŃƒƑŃƗƋƈŃƗƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃŃŃŃŃ
◆ When the receiver has the transmitter's ID in memory, a link is established and normal
operation is allowed.
◆ When the transmitter has the receiver's ID in memory, a link is established andtelemetry functions are usable.
The transmitter stores receiver IDs by model; thus, if it does not have a particular
receiver model ID stored in memory or has a different receiver ID stored, telemetryfunctions will be unusable. However, the device is operable as long as the receiver has
the transmitter's ID stored in memory.

Link of model 1

Model 1 →Model 2Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1

Device is operable if receiver
has transmitter's ID stored inmemoryModel 2: Receiver ID: --------Model 3: Receiver ID: ---------

Link
Tx ID: xxxxxx2

Rx ID: xxxxxx1

Telemetry functions unusable because
Model 2 does not have receiver's ID
stored in memory.
Transmitter switched to Model 2 andlink reestablished

Operable

Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1

Tx ID: xxxxxx2
storedModel 2: Receiver ID: ---------

Tx ID: xxxxxx2
storedLink

Model 3: Receiver ID: --------Rx ID: xxxxxx1

Telemetry usable

Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
stored for Model 1

Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 2: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 3: Receiver ID: ---------

Because receiver IDs will be stored
in the memory of each transmittermodel, it is unnecessary toreestablish a link once the receiver
ID has been stored in memory fora given model.

Telemetry usable
Rx ID: xxxxxx1

When setting up a new model, before using it, ﬁrst
establish a link with the receiver that will be usedwith it.
＜ Basic Operation ＞ 45

ŵƄƑƊƈŃŷƈƖƗƌƑƊŃżƒƘƕŃŵŒŦŃŶƜƖƗƈƐŃ
,WLVH[WUHPHO\LPSRUWDQWWRUDQJHFKHFN\RXUPRGHOVSULRUWRHDFKÀ\LQJVHVVLRQ7KLVHQDEOHV\RXWRHQVXUHWKDWHYHU\WKLQJLVIXQFWLRQLQJDVLWVKRXOGDQGWRREWDLQPD[LPXPHQMR\PHQWIURP\RXUWLPHÀ\LQJ7KH76=
transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range check.

ŵƄƑƊƈŃƆƋƈƆƎŃƐƒƇƈŃ
1. While pushing "U.MENU/MON." button.
2. THR Stick Slow.
U.MENU/MON.

3. T18SZ Power ON.
4. Select "Range check" at the System menu.

During this mode, the RF power output is reduced
so the range test can be performed. In addition, when
this mode is activated the right LED on the front of thetransmitter starts blinking and the transmitter gives users
a warning with a beeping sound.
The "Range check mode" continues for 60 seconds
and after that the power will return to the normal level.
To exit the "Range check mode" before the 60 seconds,press the "HOME/EXIT" button. NEVER start flying
when the "Range check mode" is active.
Should you require additional time to perform a range
check, highlight Restart before your time expires and tap
the screen one time.

ŵƄƑƊƈŃƆƋƈƆƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ

5. "Start" tap.

1. With the "Range check mode" on, walkaway from the model while simultaneously
operating the controls. Have an assistant
stand by the model to confirm that allcontrols are completely and correctly
operational. You should be able to walkapproximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return tothe model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yetaccessible, location so it will be within reachafter starting the engine or motor. Be certain
the throttle stick is in the low throttle position,then start the engine or motor. Perform
another range check with your assistantholding the aircraft with the engine runningat various speeds. If the servos jitter or move
inadvertently, there may be a problem. We
would strongly suggest you do not Áy until thesource of the difÀculty has been determined.
Look for loose servo connections or binding
pushrods. Also, be certain that the battery
has been fully charged.
Range checking on
low power.

About 100 feet

6. The HOME/EXIT button ispressed to end a range check.

WARNING
Do not ﬂy in the range check mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if themodel is too far from the transmitter, control will
be lost and the model will crash.

46 ＜ Basic Operation ＞

Range check mode

MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE
ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŃƅƄƖƌƆŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
ŔőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃƆƄƏƏ
Initial setting assigns 1 model to the T18SZ
transmitter. The Model Select function is used to add
models and to select models which are already set.

The data for up to 30 models can be saved to thetransmitter. Data can also be saved to the optional SD
card.

ŏ If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu.

The currently selected model name is displayed at the
WRSRIWKHVFUHHQ%HIRUHÀ\LQJDQGEHIRUHFKDQJLQJDQ\
VHWWLQJVDOZD\VFRQ¿UPWKHPRGHOQDPH

ŕőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃ
Select the model type matched to the aircraft with theModel type select function of the Linkage menu. For an
airplane, select the model type from among the 2 types:
airplane and glider. After the wing type is selected thetail type select screen is displayed. Select the tail typematched to the aircraft.
There are 13 wing types and 3 tail types for airplaneand glider.

ŏ Adjust the neutral position and control surface
angle with the linkage, and fine tune themwith the Sub trim and End point functions(angle adjustment). To protect the linkage,a limit position can also be set with the End
point function. The End point function canadjust the amount of up/down and left/rightmovement, limit, and servo speed of eachchannel.

ŖőŃũƘƖƈƏƄƊƈŃƏƌƑƎƄƊƈ
Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder, etc.
in accordance with the model's instruction manual. Fora description of the connection method, see the "Servos
connection by model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T18SZ isdifferent from that of our existing systems. Notethat even for the same "airplane model", when thewing type and tail type are different, the channel
assignment may be different. (The channel assigned
to each function can be checked at the "Function"of the Linkage menu.)ŗőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƆƘƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by aswitch without changing the throttle trim position.
Set throttle cut with the Throttle cut function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the throttle cut function
and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle position sothat the carburetor becomes fully closed. For safety, thethrottle cut function operates the throttle stick in the 1/3
or less (slow side) position.

＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 47

ŚőŃŤƌƕƅƕƄƎƈ
This function is used when an air brake is necessary
when taking off or diving, etc.
7KHSUHVHWHOHYDWRUVDQGÀDSV FDPEHUÀDSEUDNHÀDS 
offset amount can be activated by a switch.

ŘőŃŬƇƏƈŃƇƒƚƑŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
The idling speed can be lowered with one touch bya switch without changing the throttle trim position.
Perform this setting with the Idle down function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the Idle down function
and selecting the switch, adjust the idle down speed. For
safety, the idle down function acts only when the throttle
stick is slow side.

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and flap
servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the speed of theaileron, elevator, and flap servos can be adjusted. (Inside/Out side) A delay can be set for each condition,
and a cut switch which will turn OFF the delay can be
FKRVHQ7ULPDPRXQWVFDQEH¿QHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95
You can also set the auto mode, which will link Airbraketo a stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or dialcan also be set as the ON/OFF switch.

*While the Throttle cut function is in operation, the Idle downfunction does not work.

śőŃŤƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃƳƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑƖ
řőŃŤũŵŃŋŧŒŵŌ
AFR function is used to adjust the throw and operation
curve of the stick, lever, and switch functions for eachflight condition. This is normally used after End point
KDVGH¿QHGWKHPD[LPXPWKURZGLUHFWLRQVThe Condition select function automatically allocates
the Condition 1 for each model. Condition 1 is thedefault condition and is the only one active when a new
PRGHOW\SHLVGH¿QHG
,I\RXZDQWWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVSOHDVHUHIHUWRD
description of the Condition select function.

*The Condition 1 is always on, and remains on until otherconditions are activated by switches.
*When a new condition is added, the model data of theCondition 1 is automatically copied to the new condition.
*You can set the model data of new condition in the switch
ON state. However, if the group mode (Gr) was selected inadvance, the same data will be input at all the conditions.
Select the single mode (Sngl) and adjust only the condition
you want to change. For Group/Single mode switching, referto the description at the back of this manual.
*The Condition delay can be programmed for each channel.
The Condition delay is used to change the servo throwsmoothly when switching conditions.

48 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

ūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃƅƄƖƌƆŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
7KLVVHFWLRQRXWOLQHVH[DPSOHVRIXVHRIWKHKHOLFRSWHUIXQFWLRQVRIWKH76=$GMXVWWKHDFWXDOYDOXHVHWFWR
match the fuselage used.

ŔőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃƆƄƏƏ

ŖőŃũƏƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑ

Default setting assigns 1 model to the T18SZ. To add
new models or to call a model already set, use the Modelselect function.

7KHWUDQVPLWWHUFDQLQVWDOOXSWRHLJKWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVper model.

This is convenient when calling a model after
registering the model names in advance. (The data of up
to 30 models can be saved at the transmitter. Data canalso be saved to the optional SD card.)
The currently called model is displayed at the topof the screen. Before flying and before changing any
VHWWLQJVDOZD\VFRQ¿UPWKHPRGHOQDPHŕőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈŃƄƑƇŃƖƚƄƖƋŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ
If a different model type is already selected, selecthelicopter with the Model type function of the Linkage
menu, and then select the swash type matched to thehelicopter.

The Condition select function automatically allocates¿YHFRQGLWLRQVIRUKHOLFRSWHU
(General setting)ŏ Normalŏ Idle up1
ŏ Idle up2
ŏ Idle up3
ŏ HoldNote: Delete conditions you have not set
up and will not use. Otherwise you may
accidentally activate them during Áight andcause a crash.
*For a description of the condition deletion, refer to theCondition select function.

The Normal condition is always on, and remains on
until other conditions are activated by switches.
The priority is throttle hold/idle up 2/idle up 1/normal.
Throttle hold has the highest priority.
Add other conditions, as required.
The Condition delay can be programmed for eachchannel. The Condition delay is used to change the servo
throw smoothly when switching conditions.

(General Àight condition setting example)
ŏ Normal: (Use initial setting conditions/operate
when switch OFF)Use from engine starting to hovering.

ŏ Idle up 1: (Operate at SW-E center)

Use in 540 stall turn, loop, rolling stall turn, and othermaneuvers.

*The Model type function automatically selects the
DSSURSULDWHRXWSXWFKDQQHOVFRQWUROIXQFWLRQVDQGPL[LQJfunctions for the chosen model type. Eight swash types areavailable for helicopters.

ŏ Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-E forward side)
Use in rolls.

ŏ Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forward side)
Use in auto rotation.

*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to theModel type function.

＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 49

ŗőŃũƘƖƈƏƄƊƈŃƏƌƑƎƄƊƈ
Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator, pitch,and other servos in accordance with the kit instruction
manual. For a description of the connection method, see"Servos connection by model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T18SZ
is different from that of our existing systems.
(The channel assigned to each function can
be checked at the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.)

ŏ Swash plate correction (Except H-1 mode)*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of thelinkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH
function.

ŘőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŒųƌƗƆƋŃƆƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
This function adjusts the throttle or pitch operation
curve in relation to the movement of the throttle stick foreach condition.
ŏ If the direction of operation of the servo is
incorrect, use the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.

Throttle curve setting example!
Call the throttle curve of each condition with thecondition select switch.
ŏNormal curve adjustment

Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that theengine speed is constant and up/down control iseasiest.

ŏIdle up curve adjustment

The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).

ŏ Adjust the direction of operation of the gyro.
(Gyro side function)
ŏ Connect the throttle linkage so that the
carburetor can fully close at full trim throttle
cut.
ŏ Adjust the neutral position at the linkage
side and Àne tune with the Sub-Trim function
and End point function (rudder angle
adjustment). To protect the linkage, a limit
position can also be set with the End point
function.

ŏThrottle hold curve adjustment

The curve is not used when performing auto rotation
dives.
ConÀrm that the rate of the slowest position (0) of
the stick is 0 (initial setting).

<Example of pitch curve setting!
Call the pitch curve of each condition with thecondition select switch.
ŏPitch curve (Normal)

Make the pitch at hovering approximately 5º~6º.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
the 50 point as the standard.

*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function
and hovering pitch function together.

ŏPitch curve (Idle up 1)

The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve

50 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

matched to airborne Áight.
Set to -7º~12º as standard.

ŏPitch curve (Idle up 2)

The high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is +8º.

ŏPitch curve (Hold)At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at boththe high and low sides.
[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7º~+12ºśőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƋƒƏƇŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the Throttle holdfunction.

ŜőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƆƘƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the engine,by flipping a switch with the throttle stick at idle. The
action is not functional at high throttle to avoid accidental
dead sticks. The switch’s location and direction must be
chosen, as it defaults to INH.

řőŃŤũŵŃŋŧŒŵŌ
AFR (D/R) function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for eachcondition.
)RU WKURWWOH DQG SLWFK FXUYH VHWWLQJV UHIHU WR WKH DERYH
mentioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"

7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QGSRLQWKDVGH¿QHGWKH
PD[LPXPWKURZGLUHFWLRQV

*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until theengine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not binding.

ŔœőŃŶƚƄƖƋŃŰƌƛŃƆƒƕƕƈƆƗƖŃƄƌƏƈƕƒƑŏŃ
ƈƏƈƙƄƗƒƕŃƄƑƇŃƓƌƗƆƋŃƌƑƗƈƕƄƆƗƌƒƑ
7KH VZDVK PL[LQJ IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG WR FRUUHFW WKHswash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic) andelevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction corresponding toeach operation of each condition.

ŚőŃŪƜƕƒŃƖƈƑƖƌƗƌƙƌƗƜŃƄƑƇŃƐƒƇƈŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƌƑƊ
The gyro sensitivity and mode switching function is
GHGLFDWHGJ\URPL[LQJRIWKH0RGHOPHQXDQGFDQEHVHW
for each condition.

ŔŔőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƐƌƛƌƑƊŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
,I WKURWWOH PL[LQJ LV QHFHVVDU\ WR FRPSHQVDWH IRU HQJLQH
slowing caused when the swash plate operates at the sametime as ailerons or elevator, please refer to the Throttle
PL[LQJIXQFWLRQŔŕőŃŲƗƋƈƕŃƖƓƈƆƌƄƏŃƐƌƛƌƑƊƖ
ŏPitch to Needle mixingŏNormal condition (hovering): Gyro sensitivity
maximumŏIdle up 1/Idle up 2/Throttle hold: Gyro
sensitivity minimumŏHowever, at auto rotation of a tail-driven
helicopter, this function may not have any
effect at high gyro sensitivity.

This mixing is used with engines that allow needle
control during flight (fuel-air mixture adjustment).
A needle curve can be set. The needle servo
rise characteristics at throttle stick acceleration/
deceleration operation can be adjusted.
(Acceleration function)ŏGovernor mixing

This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when agovernor is used. Up to 3 rates (speeds) can beswitched for each condition.

＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 51

ŶƈƕƙƒŃƆƒƑƑƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƅƜŃƐƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈ
The T18SZ transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type selectedwith the Model type function of the Linkage menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for each model type isshown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.
*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage menu. The channel assignments can also be changed.
For more information, read the description of the Function menu.

ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔNormal tail and V tailAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

RudderThrottle

RudderThrottle

Rudder4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderAileron2

RudderAileron2

RudderAileron2

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Gear

Flap

Gear

Aileron3

Gear

Aileron3

6

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron2

Flap2

Aileron2 Aileron4 Aileron2 Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap

Flap3

Aileron3

Flap

Aileron3

Flap

8

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

Aileron4

Flap2

Aileron4

Flap2

9

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

Flap

Motor

Flap

Flap3

10

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

Flap2

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

16

AUX1

AUX1

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

NormalElevator 1 servo

52 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

V-tailT-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
2AIL
2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPRX
CH Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane GliderŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔAilevator

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

6

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

7

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3

8

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

9

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

10

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

11

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX2

Butterﬂy

AUX2

Butterﬂy

AUX4

Butterﬂy

16

AUX1

AUX1

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber Camber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

Elevator 2 servo＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 53

T-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
2AIL
2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPRX
CH Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane GliderŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔTailless wing

4AIL+2FLAP

4AIL+4FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron

2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

15

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber16

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

Flying Wing

54 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

T-FHSS

2AIL+4FLAPFASST MULT

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem2AILRXCH Airplane GliderŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
ƔTailless wing :inglet 2 Rudder
4AIL+4FLAP

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

GliderAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

Aileron3

6

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Rudder2

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Rudder2

Rudder2

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

15

CamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamberCamber16

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

Elevator

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

Airplane1

Rudder 2 servo* Output channels differ by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels,
there is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function
UHTXLUHGRXWRIWKHUDQJHRIWKHDUURZRID¿JXUH＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 55

T-FHSS

4AIL+2FLAPFASST MULT

2AIL+4FLAPFASSTest 18CH

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem

2AIL

RX
CH

ūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕ

1

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

RudderRudder

5

Gyro

Gyro

6

Pitch

Pitch

7

Governor

Governor

8

Elevator2

Governor2

9

Gyro2

Gyro2

10

Gyro3

Gyro3

11

Governor2

Needle12

Needle

AUX5

13

AUX4
X4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW

DG2

SW

H-4/H-4X Swash

All other

1

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

Elevator2

Rudder

5

Pitch

Pitch

6

Gyro

Gyro

7

Governor

Governor8

RudderGovernor2

9

Gyro2

Gyro2

10

Gyro3

Gyro3

DG1

SW

DG2

SW

56 ＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞

FASSTest 12CHCH

T-FHSS

All other

FASST MULT

H-4/H-4X Swash

The output
CH of eachsystemƔFASSTest 12CH

CH

The output FASSTest 18CH
CH of each S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

ƔFASSTest 18CH / FASST MULTI / FASST 7CH / SFHSS

ŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕ

2

Elevator

3

Throttle

4

Rudder

5

Gyro

6

Gyro2

7

Gyro3

8

Camera TILT

9

Camera PAN

10

Camera REC

11

Mode

12

AUX5

13

AUX4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW SD

DG2

SW SA

T-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

Multicopter

The output
CH of eachsystemCH＜ Model Basic Setting Procedure ＞ 57

SYSTEM MENUThe System menu sets up functions of thetransmitter. This does not set up any model data.

ŏ When the System menu button is tapped,
the menu shown below is called up. Tap thefunction button that you want to enter.

ŏReturn to Home screenŶƜƖƗƈƐŃƐƈƑƘŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
[Display]: Display adjustment.
[Sound volume]: Adjust the volume of: Other sound, Warning, Voice[Date and Time]: Sets the date and time (system clock setting) and resets the system timer.
[H/W setting]: Stick mode selection (Mode 1 - Mode 4 ). J1-J4 sticks correction can be performed.
[Battery]: Battery alarm voltage setting. Auto power off time setting.
[Range check]: The output of the transmitter is lowered, for Range checking.
[S.Bus servo]: S.Bus servo setting.
[Information]: Sets the User name, Language, and Unit system. Displays the program version, and SD
card information.

58 ＜ System menu ＞

Display
The following LCD screen adjustments:
ŏ Backlighting brightness adjustment
ŏ Backlighting decrease time adjustment
ŏ Touch screen calibration

ŏ Tap the [Display] button in the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

Backlight max. brightness adjustment

Touch calibration

1. Adjust the backlighting brightness with thevalue input buttons.

This function adjusts the location of the Touch
Panel. Press the "Touch calibration" button.
The calibration screen will then pop up.
Tap the center of the cross hair cursor on
the screen with the soft pen. As soon as thesystem recogni]es the position, the cursor
will move on to the next position. Repeat thisprocedure as long as the cursor moves to next
position. You will do this Àve times. Calibration
will be carried out based on the Àve positions.
Disappearance of the cross hair cursor means
the calibration has been completed.

:KHQ WKH Ÿ EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ EHFRPHVEULJKWHU:KHQ WKH ź EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ
becomes darker.

Backlight min. brightness adjustment
1. Adjust the backlight decrease brightness withthe value input buttons.
:KHQ WKH Ÿ EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ EHFRPHVEULJKWHU:KHQ WKH ź EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ
becomes darker.
*It cannot be made brighter than Backlighting brightness
adjustment.

*In ordinary operation, this calibration is not necessary. If
you notice the Touch Panel is not functioning correctly after
long use, we recommend that you carry out this calibration.

Backlight decrease time
1. You can set a time period to decrease the
LCD backlight. This function counts the periodthat the Touch Panel has been not operated.
This time can be set by ten-second steps. You
can also turn off the backlight decrease* ifyou like.
*The backlight consumes a large amount of power. We
recommend that you turn off the backlight by setting thebacklight power-off time to about one minute.

＜ System menu ＞ 59

Sound volume

Sound volume settingThis function can set the volume of "Other
sound," "Warning," and "Voice," respectively.
ŏ Tap the [Sound volume] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

The respective volume
control

Sound volume Setting method
1. When the Sound volume box is tapped, theabove screen will appear.

2. You can change the sound volume bytapping the " ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " buttonof four items.
*If you tap " ▲ ", the volume will increase. If you tap the" ▼ ", the volume will decrease.

Date and Time Date and time setting (system clock setting) and integrating timer resettingThis function adjusts the system clock of the
T18SZ transmitter. Perform this setting when you
purchase the set and when adjustment is necessary.

The system timer can also be reset.
*The system timer is displayed on the Home screen.

ŏ Tap the [Date and Time] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

● Total : Regardless of amodel, additional time incase a power supply is ON
is displayed.

Adjusts the clock ifpressed.

● Model : The additionaltime when the power
supply was set to ON isdisplayed for every model.

Resets the timer if
pressed.

Date setting

System timer reset

1. Tap the "Year", "Month", or "Day" button andset the date by tapping the "ʆʆ" "ʆ" "ʈʈ""ʈ" button.
2. Tap ´Time adjustµ, the timer is renewal.

The system timer shows the total timethat has elapsed since the last "reset".
1. Tap "Total" or "Model", to reset is chosen.
2. When the [System timer] button is tapped.
3. Tap ´Yesµ in the next screen, the timer isreset.

Time setting
1. Tap the "Hour" "Minute" or "Second" button,and set the time by tapping the "ʆʆ" "ʆ""ʈʈ" "ʈ" button.
2. Tap ´Time adjustµ, the timer is renewal.

60 ＜ System menu ＞

Stick mode selection and -1--4 sticks calibration

H/W setting

Stick mode
Mode 1-4 can be chosen.
But, it isn't changed until data is reset.

Usually, this H/W setting is unnecessary.
Please perform this calibration only if a change at
the center of a stick should arise after prolonged use.
ŏ Tap the [Calibration] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn toSystem menu

How to Calibrate
1. Tap the "Calibration" button.

To change the mode the stick ratchet
must be changed. Request that thisbe done by Futaba Service. (Charged
PRGL¿FDWLRQ

MODE1

MODE2

MODE3

MODE4

3OHDVHGRQRWSUHVVWKHVWLFNWRR¿UPO\LQDQ\GLUHFWLRQZKHQ
doing the calibration.
*Check after calibration to make sure that neutral is 0%, thebottom right side is +100%, and the top left side is -100%.

2. Choose the stick to calibrate right and left.
3. The stick is set at neutral and the [Set neutral]
button is tapped.

TappedFull right andfull bottom

TappedThe stick is set at
neutralTapped

4. The stick is held at full right and full bottom(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.
5. The stick is held at full left and full top(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.

Full left andfull top＜ System menu ＞ 61

Low battery alarm voltage set

Battery

Select the battery alarm voltage according to thebattery to be used.
It isn't indicated in caseof manual setting.

ŏReturn to System menu

Battery type change :LiFe(2cells) → NiMH(5cells)→ Manual setting
When choosing manual
setting, the numericalvalue can be input.
It's dangerous to
set it manually inthe low voltage.

Auto power off time setting

Vibrator Types

This function prevents battery
discharging if the transmitter power
supply does not erase.
1. Adjust the auto power off time withthe value input buttons.

Type 1
Type 2*When the time the transmitter is inactive reaches
the set time, the power is turned off automatically.
This time can be set up to 1 hour in 10 minutes
increments. The auto power off function can also
be deactivated.

Type 3*When the low battery voltage setting is changed, it is changed forevery model in the transmitter. A unique voltage cannot be set foreach model. A change in the low battery voltage setting also does
not reset other data.

*An audible alarm is sounded from 3 minutes
before auto power off. When a stick or switch isoperated, the alarm is cleared.

Range Check

Before a Áight ground range check.

The 'range check mode' reduces the transmission
range of the radio waves to allow for a ground
range check.
*The range check mode, when activated, will continue for
60 seconds unless the user exits this mode early. When the
progress bar reaches 60 second mark, the RF transmission
automatically returns to the normal operating power.

Refer to P.46
62 ＜ System menu ＞

WARNING
Do not ﬂy in the range check
mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves isshort, if the model is too far from thetransmitter, control will be lost and themodel will crash.

S.Bus servo

S.BUS servo setting

An S.BUS(2) servo can memorize the channel
and various settings you input. Servo setting canbe performed on the T18SZ screen by wiring the
VHUYRDVVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH
* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions whichcannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display
screen will change. (Only the function which can be used bya servo is displayed.)* After reading completion, with connection of the above¿JXUHLIDVWLFNLVPRYHGVHUYRRSHUDWLRQFDQEHWHVWHG
S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servoŏ Call the following setting screen by pressing the[S.Bus Servo] button in the System menu.
ŏReturn to System menu

Procedure for changing S.BUS servo setting
1. Select [S.Bus servo] of the System menu.
2. Wire the servo as shown in the Àgure above.
3. Press [Read]. The ID and current setting ofthat servo are displayed.

4. When multiple servos are connected change[INH] at the right side of the ID number on thescreen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Press [Write]. The settings are changed.

ƔServo ID number
If you use multiple S.BUS servos, only the desired
servo in the group can be set by entering the ID of
WKDWVSHFL¿FVHUYR

3-way hubor Y-harnesses
76=

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

＜ System menu ＞ 63

S.BUS Servo Description of each parameter's function*There are functions that can and cannot be performed according to the servo type.

• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.

• Channel
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.

• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.

• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the speciﬁed direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, theﬁrst initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the speciﬁed position.

• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be speciﬁed. The "Hold" mode setting holds
the servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.

• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smoothsetting is used for normal ﬂight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.

• Neutral Offset
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel isrestricted on one side.

• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matchedwithout being affected by motor ﬂuctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servo's
operating voltage is increased.

• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be speciﬁed.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal
change.
Large Value Setting ĺ Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current
consumption will increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.

• Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.

• BoostThe minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small
travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be
immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large Value Setting ĺ Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is toolarge, operation will become rough.

64 ＜ System menu ＞

• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)• DamperThe characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value
is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur,depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs eventhough the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to avalue larger than the initial value.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large Value Setting ĺ When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel likethe servo response has worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo
will also be shortened.

• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target
position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large Value Setting ĺ Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.

• Buzzer
When a servo is powered up without a transmitter signal, a buzzer sounds.
(When transmitter signal is lost, a buzzer sounds until the servo regains the signal. This is not unusual.
The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply → The buzzer sound of about 1.25
Hz continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.
(Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON.
sound by incorrect recognition.)

A buzzer may*Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more thanneeded or do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.

WARNING
While S.BUS servo writes, you aren't
supposed to remove a connection of a
servo and turn oﬀ a power supply of atransmitter.
■Data of S.BUS servo is damaged and breaks
down.

WARNING
Do not use the S.I/F (S.BUS servo setup)connector with anything other thanhigh-voltage-capable servos.
■Transmitter battery voltage is conveyed directly.
Using anything other than high-voltage-capableservos presents the danger that they will break.

＜ System menu ＞ 65

Information

The program version and SD card si]e are displayed. The User name,language and Unit system used by the system can also be changed.

This function registers the T18SZ user nameand the language displayed at proportional can bechanged.

The Information screen displays the T18SZ
system program version information, SD card
(memory size, card free size) information.

Telemetry numerical values can be displayed ineither metric or SAE (yard-pound) units.

*If an SD card is not inserted, no memory card information
will be displayed.
2/3 : WEB Manual QR code
3/3 : Manufacturer Information

ŏ Tap the [Information] button at the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to System menu

Telemetry Display Unit
[Metric]
Distance --- m (meter)
Speed --- km/h (kilometers per
hour)
Variometer --- m/s (meter per
second)Temperature --- ℃ (centigrade)[Yard]
Distance --- yard
Altitude --- feet
Speed --- mph (mile per hour)
Variometer --- fpm (ft per min)Temperature --- ℉ (fahrenheit)
Movement of a cursor of an input box
Fix and return to an
information screen.

Back space (Input box)
Next page(Character list 2/4 - 4/4)
An input box is reset

Input boxŵƈƊƌƖƗƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƘƖƈƕŊƖŃƑƄƐƈ
T18SZ transmitter can register user's name.
How to register user's name
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
2. Select "user's name" and then the keyboard
will pop up.
3. You can use up to 15 characters as a user'sname. Use the keyboard on the screen toenter user's name.

66 ＜ System menu ＞

The language displayed at proportional canbe changed. The initial setting is English, but
diﬀerent languages can be selected.

LINKAGE MENU
The Linkage menu is made up of functions which
perform model addition, model type selection, end
point setting, and other model basic settings.
ŏ Tap the [Linkage menu] button in the Home
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

ůƌƑƎƄƊƈŃƐƈƑƘŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
[Servo monitor]: Displays the servo test and operation position[Model select]: Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting[Model type]: Model type, wing type, tail type, swash type, selection[Servo reverse]: Servo direction reversal[End point]: Servo basic rate adjustment and limit setting[Servo speed]: Servo speed setting[Sub-trim]: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo[Function]: Channel assignment of each function can be changed[Fail safe]: Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting[System type]: System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, telemetry mode selection[Trim setting]: Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim
[Throttle cut]: Stops the engine safely and easily[Idle down]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine>6ZDVKULQJ@/LPLWVWKHVZDVKSODWHWUDYHOWRZLWKLQD¿[HGUDQJH KHOLFRSWHURQO\>6ZDVK@6ZDVK$)5DQGOLQNDJHFRUUHFWLRQIXQFWLRQ KHOLFRSWHURQO\H[FHSWVZDVKW\SH+
[Stick alarm]: Can be set so that an audible alarm sounds when the throttle stick reaches the set position.
[Timer]: Timer setting[Function name]: Function name can be changed[Sensor]: Various telemetry sensors setting[Telemetry]: Displays various data sent from the receiver[Tele.setting]: Telemetry data log[Trainer]: Starts and sets the trainer system.
>:DUQLQJVHWWLQJ@0L[LQJWKURWWOHSRVLWLRQZDUQLQJUHVHW
[User menu setting]: Original menu making>'DWHUHVHW@0RGHOPHPRU\VHWGDWDUHVHW E\LWHP＜ Linkage menu ＞ 67

Servo monitor

Servo Test

This is used for testing servo movement.
³0RYLQJ 7HVW´ UHSHWLWLRQ PRGH  DQG ³1HXWUDO
7HVW´ ¿[HGSRVLWLRQPRGH DUHDYDLODEOH
 7KH ³1HXWUDO 7HVW´ LV JRRG IRU ILQGLQJ WKHneutral position of a servo horn.

Graph Display / Displays servo positions.

In order to prevent any potential difficulties,
the servo test function will be inoperable, or
LQDFFHVVLEOHXQGHUFHUWDLQFRQGLWLRQV6SHFL¿FDOO\the Servo Test function is not operational if the
7KURWWOH FXW LV 21 LQ HLWKHU DLUSODQH RU KHOLFRSWHU
PRGHV RU LI WKH7KURWWOH KROG LV 21 LQ KHOLFRSWHU
mode.
Test mode change :OFF → Neutral → Moving

ŏ Select [Servo monitor] at the linkage menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

＜ or ＞● Long press the [U.MENU/
MON.] button in the
Home screen to call the
setup screen shown.

ŏReturn to Home orLinkage menu

Each channel movement can be checked.

[Moving]: Mode which repeats operation ofeach servo[Neutral]: Mode which locks each servo in theneutral position

Select the [OFF] or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button → Testing is
stoppedWARNING
Don't set a servo test mode when thedrive motor is connected and the engine
has been started.
■ Inadvertent rotation of the motor or acceleration of theengine is extremely dangerous.

68 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Model selectThe Model selection function performs model addition, call,deletion, copy, and model name setting.

This function is used to load the settings of the
GHVLUHGPRGHOLQWRWKH76=¶VPHPRU\The settings may be selected from either the
WUDQVPLWWHU¶V EXLOWLQ PHPRU\ RU DQ 6' FDUG
0%*%  5HPHPEHU WKDW XS WR  PRGHO
memories are available in the transmitter.
The name of the model stored in the transmitterand the SD card may be changed. This can be very
useful to tell different models settings apart. Each
PRGHOQDPHFDQEHDVORQJDVFKDUDFWHUVDQG
the model name always appears in the display
ŏ Select [Model select] at
the linkage menu andcall the setup screen
shown below.

screen.
The Copy function is used to copy one setof model data into a second memory within thetransmitter and the SD card. It may be used forgetting a head-start on setting up models withDOPRVWWKHVDPHVHWWLQJV RQO\GLIIHUHQFHVQHHGWR
EHPRGL¿HGLQVWHDGRIHQWHULQJWKHFRPSOHWHPRGHOIURPVFUDWFK $OVRWKLVIXQFWLRQPD\EHXVHGWR
make a backup copy of a model setup before anychanges are made.

● When model data on
a SD card is used, thisicon appears.

＜ or ＞● Tap the [Model select]button in the Home
screen to call the setup
screen shown below.

ŏReturn to Home orLinkage menu

Current model isgreen.

Model addition
1. Tap the [New] button.

● "Save to"[Internal]: transmitter
memory[SD card]: SD card
The date by which themodel was made ﬁrst.
In case of a model on a
SD card, the file name isindicated. (The ﬁle name
can't be changed.)

2. Tap [Yes] to add the model. (When you wantto cancel model addition, tap [No].)*The added model is displayed in the model list.
*When a model is added, a receiver link is required.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 69

Model call

Model deletion

1. Tap the Internal or SD card. Select thelocation to which the desired model is to be
saved.

1. Tap the select model name or the model you
want to delete in the model list.
(The model currently selected cannot bedeleted.)2. Tap the [Delete] button.

Blue model would
be deleted.

2. Tap the desired model in the model list.
3. Tap the [Select] button.

3. Tap [Yes]. (When you want to stop model
deletion, tap [No].)

4. Tap [Yes] to call the model. (When you wantto cancel model call, press [No].)Blue model wasdeleted.

70 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Model name change

Model copy

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be changed. The current model name,tap.
2. When [Rename] is tapped, a keyboard
appears on the screen.

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be copied. The current model name,tap.

Current model (green)is chosen (blue).
Current model (green)is chosen (blue).

3. Enter the model name from this keyboard.
8SWRFKDUDFWHUVFDQEHLQSXWDWWKHPRGHOQDPH

2. Tap the "Copy" button and tap thedestination button and select the copy
storage destination. (Internal or SD card)

When you are done
renaming, tap Model name.

3. When [Internal]or [SD card] is tapped,
copying is executed.

Completion of rename

WARNING
Never launch the Model Selection function
while the engine is starting or the motor drive
wiring is connected.
■Careless spinning of propellers or rotors isextremely dangerous.

WARNING
Carefully check that the aircraft to be used andthe model selected match up.
■Using a model which does not match the aircraft
runs the risk of the aircraft ﬂying out of control
and crashing. Perform a careful operations checkprior to ﬂight.

Add new copied model*If there is no model with the same name in the copy
destination, the name of the copied model is saved. If there
is a model of the same name, a number is added at the endof the model name and the model is copied. You can change
the name later.
*Indication date : When the model data is copied, the creation
date for the current model is recorded.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 71

This function selects the model type from among airplane, glider,helicopter, and multicopter.

Model type

6HYHQW\SHVRIPDLQZLQJV VL[W\SHVRIÀ\LQJ
ZLQJ DQGWKUHHW\SHVRIWDLOZLQJVDUHDYDLODEOH
for airplanes. Eight swash types are available
for helicopters. Seven types of main wings andthree types of tail wings are available for gliders.
)XQFWLRQVDQGPL[LQJIXQFWLRQVQHFHVVDU\IRUHDFKmodel type are set in advance at the factory.

Note: The Model Type function automatically selects
the appropriate output channels, control functions,and mixing functions for the chosen model type.
When the Model Type Selection command isaccessed, all of the data in the active memory iscleared. Be sure that you don·t mind losing this data,or back it up to another memory using the copying
functions.

( The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)ŏ Select [Model type] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to LinkagemenuModel type selection
1. Model type selection [Model icon], tap.
2. Set the Model type, Wing type(Airplane/
Glider), Tail type(Airplane/Glider), or Swash
type(Helicopter) by using the appropriate
button.
3. Set the type you choose by tapping[Enter] → [Yes] at the confirmation screen.
(When you want to cancel model typeselection, tap [No].)ŏ When a data change will occur, the confirmation
screen of data initiali]ation menu will be displayed.
A push on [yes] will initiali]e data and allow changes.
A push on [no] will stop data changes.

2. [Yes], tap
1. [Enter], tap

72 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Set the type you
choose by tapping.

Airplane/Glider : Choose thewing type and tail.

Helicopter : Choose theswash type.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 73

Servo Reverse

Use to reverse the servo throw direction.

Servo Reverse changes the direction of an
LQGLYLGXDO VHUYR¶V UHVSRQVH WR D FRQWURO VWLFNmovement.
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read thesection on Swash AFR before reversing any servos.
With CCPM helicopters, always complete yourservo reversing prior to any other programming.
,I\RXXVHSUHEXLOW$LUSODQH*OLGHUIXQFWLRQVWKDW
control multiple servos, it may be confusing totell whether the servo needs to be reversed or asetting in the function needs to be reversed. See theinstructions for each specialized function for further
details. Always check servo direction prior to everyÀLJKWDVDQDGGLWLRQDOSUHFDXWLRQWRFRQ¿UPSURSHU
model memory, hook ups, and radio function.

WARNING
Before a ﬂight, always check that yourmodel's servo operation, the directionof control surfaces, and switch setup
are correct.
Default setting of the throttle/motor
channel is always reverse.

ŏ Tap the [Servo reverse] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.
Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

Tap the “Yes”→ Reverse

Servo reversing procedure
After setting up a new model, be sure to
GHILQH DOO VSHFLDO PHQXV %H VXUH WKDW DOO VHUYRV
are plugged into the proper receiver channels.
1RZGHWHUPLQHZKHWKHU\RXQHHGWRUHYHUVHDQ\channels by moving each stick and observing the
FRUUHVSRQGLQJPRYHPHQWLQWKHPRGHO¶VFRQWUROV

74 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

1. Tap the desired channel·s setting button tochoose the proper direction for the servo.
2. Tap ´Yesµ in the next screen.
3. Repeat for each servo needing reversal.
When done, tap ´Servo reverseµ to return to
the Linkage menu.

End point

Sets the travel, limit point.

The End point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates differential throws, andwill correct improper linkage settings.

30 〜
140%

7KHWUDYHOUDWH QRUPDOIXOOVWLFNPRYHPHQWDWKLJK UDWHV  FDQ EH YDULHG IURP  WR  LQ
HDFKGLUHFWLRQRQFKDQQHOVWR$OVRWKHOLPLWSRLQW KRZ IDU WKH VHUYR WUDYHOV ZKHQ D PL[ LV
LQYROYHG ZKHUHVHUYRWKURZVWRSVPD\EHYDULHGIURPWR

ŏ Tap the [End point] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup
screen shown below.

Travel rate

30 〜
140%

Limit point
Next pageCh7-16

ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Tap the values you
wish to adjust andvalue input buttons
will appear on-screen.

Left / Top

Right / Bottom

Indicates the current
direction of the stick, etc.
(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

Servo travel adjustment

Limit point adjustment

1. Tap the travel button of the channel you
want to set. Value input buttons appear on
the screen.
2. Use these buttons to adjust the rate.
ŏInitial value: 100ŏAdjustment range: 30~140
3. Repeat the procedure above for each rate.

1. Tap the limit button of the channel you want
to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the limit
point.
ŏInitial value: 135ŏAdjustment range: 0~155
3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 75

Servo speed

Sets the speed of each servo.

The Servo speed setting is used to set the servo
delay for each channel, from channel l to channel
7KHV\VWHPXVHVWKHSURJUDPPHGVSHHG GHOD\ 
to slow down servo position changes. The Servo

VSHHGVHWWLQJFDQEHYDULHGIURPWRLQHDFKchannel.

ŏ Tap the [Servo speed] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.

（First）0 〜 27（Slowly）

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Servo speed setting
1. Tap the speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: 0~27 (steps)

3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

Sub-trim

Setting of neutral position of each servo.

The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fineadjustments to the control surface after linkages

and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set totheir center position.

To close this screen, tap the [Servo speed]
button.

ŏ Tap the [Sub-trim] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Sub-trim adjustment
1. Tap the trim display part of the channel you
want to adjust.
Value input buttons appears on the Sub-trim
menu screen.

2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the subtrim.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: -240~+240 (steps)*See above

3. Repeat this step for each channel.

76 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Function

Channel assignment for each function can be changed to suit your needs.

:KHQ\RXVHOHFWPRGHODQGZLQJ VZDVK W\SHVyou will find that the optimized combinations ofservo output channels and functions have been
already preset. If you would like, on the functionsetting screen of the linkage menu, you can freelychange combinations of servo output channels,
IXQFWLRQV DLOHURQ HOHYDWRU HWF  DQG LQSXWFRQWUROOHUV VWLFNVVZLWFKHVWULPOHYHUVDQGWULPVZLWFKHV <RXFDQDOVRDVVLJQWKHVDPHIXQFWLRQWR
multiple servo output channels such as assigning
HOHYDWRUIXQFWLRQWR&+DQG&+

DG1, DG2 (switch channels)
7KHVHWZRFKDQQHOVFDQEHXVHGDVVZLWFK 2Q
2II FKDQQHOV<RXFDQIUHHO\FKDQJHFRPELQDWLRQV
between servo output channels and input controllers
VWLFNVVZLWFKHVWULPOHYHUVDQGWULPVZLWFKHV 
Channel restrictions by a System Type)$667HVW&+&+6ZLWFK)$667HVW&+&+6ZLWFK)$66708/7,&+6ZLWFK)$667&+&+6)+66&+7)+66&+6ZLWFKŏ Tap the [Function] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Function change

Operation control change

1. Tap the function button of the channel you
want to change to call the Function select.

1. Tap the control button of the channel you
want to change. A control select screen(stick, switch, knob, trim lever, etc.) isdisplayed.

2. Select the function you want to change.
2. Select the control you want to operate.
*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 77

Trim change
1. Tap the trim button to call the trim setup
screen.

H/W reverse
2. The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen.
ŏ Hardware setting (Selection of switch, etc.
which controls trim)ŏ Rate settingŏ Trim mode setting
Normal mode: Normal trim (linear) operation
ATL mode: ATL operation mode. (Works at only one
end of operation) Reverse is also possible.
Center mode: Maximum change near center by
center trim operation (Does not change at end of
the stick movement)This function reverses the operation signal of the
sticks, switches, trim levers, and knobs.
1RWH7KLV VHWWLQJ UHYHUVHV WKH DFWXDO RSHUDWLRQ
signal, but does not change the display of the
LQGLFDWRUVRQWKHGLVSOD\8VHWKH1RUPDOPRGHDV
long as there is no special reason to use the reverse
mode.

The Motor function is used when switching the
motor ON/OFF (mostly for motor gliders). For
most EP planes, the throttle can be left as-is whencontrolling the motor by stick. This means that thevarious throttle-related functions are usable via
motor control.

Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.
Tap the “Yes”→ H/W reverse

78 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Fail safe

Sets the servos' operating position when transmitter signals can nolonger be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.

The Fail safe function is used to set up positions
that the servos will move to in the case of radio
LQWHUIHUHQFH'H¿QHVVHUYRSRVLWLRQZKHQVLJQDOVDUH
lost and when receiver battery voltage becomes low.
You may set either of two positions for eachFKDQQHO+ROGZKHUHWKHVHUYRPDLQWDLQVLWVODVW
commanded position, or fail safe, where each servo
moves to a predetermined position. You may choose
either mode for each channel.
7KH 76= V\VWHP DOVR SURYLGHV \RX ZLWKan advanced battery monitoring function thatwarns you when the receiver battery has only alittle power remaining. In this case, each servo is
PRYHGWRWKHGH¿QHGIDLOVDIHSRVLWLRQ7KHEDWWHU\IDLOVDIHPD\EHUHOHDVHGE\RSHUDWLQJDSUHGH¿QHG
FRQWURORQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU GHIDXOWLVWKURWWOH Do
not continue to fly. Land as soon as possible.
Remember, if the predefined control suddenly

moves to a position you did not command, land atonce and check your receiver battery.
Do not continue to Ày. Land as soon as possible.
Defines servo position when signals are lost andwhen receiver battery voltage becomes low.

WARNINGFor safety, always set the fail safe functions.
■ Especially set the throttle channel fail safe function
so that the servo moves to the maximum slow side
for airplanes and to the slow side from the hovering
position for helicopters. Crashing of the model at fullhigh when normal radio waves cannot be received due
to interference, etc., is very dangerous.
■ If fail safe is reset by throttle stick movement, the failsafe may be mistaken as an engine malfunction andwill be reset at low throttle and the model will continue
to ﬂy. If you have any doubts, immediately land.

ŏ Tap the [Fail safe] button in the Linkage menu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Fail safe setting procedure
Decide which channels you want to go to preset
positions, and which ones you want to maintaintheir last commanded position. To select the failsafe mode you wish to set, use the F/S button. This
EXWWRQWRJJOHVEHWZHHQWKHWZRPRGHV +ROG)6
F/S mode setting:
1. Tap the F/S button of the channel you want
to set, and set that channel to the [F/S]mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, control, slider,or other control in the position you want the
servo to move to when the fail safe functionis activated, and tap the F/S position button.
That position is displayed in percentage.
:KHQ\RXZDQWWRUHWXUQWKDWFKDQQHOWRWKH+ROGPRGHWDS
the [F/S] button again.

Battery fail safe setting procedure
7RVHOHFWWKH%)6PRGHWDSWKH>%)6@EXWWRQ
Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between>2))@DQG>%)6@

B.F/S setting:
1. Tap the [B.F/S] button of the desired channel
to set it to the B.F/S mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, VR, slider,or other control in the position you want
the servo to move to when the battery failsafe function is activated, and tap the F/S
position button. This position is displayed inpercentage.
:KHQ\RXZDQWWRUHWXUQWKDWFKDQQHOWR2))WDSWKH>%)6@
button again.

Battery Fail safe release function
This function releases the predefined control
from its held position after indicating that yourreceiver battery is low.
1. Enter the control setting screen by tapping
the Battery F/S release button. Now, you may
choose whether moving the throttle resets
the condition, or select a stick or switch todeactivate it. To set a desired throttle release
position, move the throttle stick to the point
at which you wish the B.F/S to be released.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 79

System mode setting, Receiver link

System type
System Type selection

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 18CH )7KH 76= LV IRU *+] RQO\ 7KH V\VWHP
FDQEHFKDQJHGIURPDPRQJFKRLFHV)$667HVW
&+ )$667HVW&+ )$667 08/7, )$667
&+7)+666)+66,WLV)$667HVW&+DQG
)$667HVW&+ZKLFKFDQEHFKRVHQE\56%
VHW7KHPHWKRGRIVHOHFWLRQLVRQWKHQH[WSDJH

'XDO UHFHLYHUV FDQ EH OLQNHG ZLWK WKH76=
Two receivers are recognized individually by ID
QXPEHUV )RU H[DPSOH LQ 56% &+ RXWSXW
setting function is used, by setting the first as as
&+ DQG VHWWLQJ WKH VHFRQG DV &+
Two sets of receivers can be used as a set in the
PRGHODOORZLQJ\RXFKDQQHOV6HSDUDWHIDLOVDIH
voltage can be set to each receiver.
+RZHYHUWHOHPHWU\FDQQRWEHXVHGIRUWKHQG
receiver.

*If you change the System type, other model data is not reset.
*After any change, remember to test the model and fully
check servo direction and motion.
$QDORJ VHUYRV FDQQRW EH XVHG ZLWK WKH 56% LQ WKH)$667HVW&+PRGHŏ Select [System type] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkagemenu

Telemetry function (FASSTest /T-FHSS mode
only)
To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry” to“ACT”.

Receiver linking
7KH UHFHLYHU ZLOO RQO\ EH FRQWUROOHG ZLWKRXWEHLQJ DIIHFWHG E\ RWKHU WUDQVPLWWHUV  E\ WKHtransmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver
other than one purchased as a set, linking isnecessary.
Moreover, a re-link is required when a newmodel is added by model selection, and at the timeof system type change.
Linking method

P.43

Cases when linking is necessary:
・When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
・When the communication system was changed.
(FASSTest18CH ↔ FASSTest12CH etc. )・When a new model was created by model
selection.

80 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

DL Interval (FASSTest/T-FHSS mode only)
When a telemetry function is enabled, the
UHFHLYLQJ LQWHUYDO GRZQOLQN LQWHUYDO  RI VHQVRU
data can be changed.
If a DL interval is increased, the response of
the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick
response will improve.
Battery fail-safe voltage setup (FASSTest /T-FHSS mode only)
The voltage at which battery fail-safe activates
FDQEHVHWZKHQ\RXOLQN 9 7KHUHFHLYHU
memorizes the setting as it was at link.
Since power consumption varies with battery
type, servos and condition, please select the failsafe activation voltage for your own model.

The example for choosing System Type-Response speed haspriority over numberof channels-Want to use apreviously used
receiver as is-Want to use aminiature receiver
for indoor planes-Want to use a large
number of telemetryfunctions-Telemetry requires
only the current
receiver battery

FASST MULTIFASSTest 12CH

R7008SB
R7003SB
R7014SB
R7018SB
R7006SB-Want to use an
S-FHSS systemminiature receiver

FASST 7CH

-Want to use more channels-Want to use a large numberof telemetry functions

FASSTest 18CH

-Want to use an
T-FHSS system
receiverR7008SB
R7003SB
R7014SB
R7018SB
R7006SB

R608FS
R6008HS
R6108SB
R6208SB
R6014HS
R6014FS
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE
R7014SB
R7018SB
R7006SB

T-FHSS Air
R617FS
R6004FF
R616FFM
R6106HF
R6106HFC
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE
R7006SB

R3006SB
R3008SB
R3001SB*R3106GF

S-FHSSR2006GS
R2106GF
R2008SB
R2001SB(Usable receivers)(As of March 2017)*Remark --- R3106GF is none telemetry
6 channels receiver. R3106GF does nothave telemetry function.

System type
■ FASSTest 18CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to
18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.
■ FASSTest 12CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to 12channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used, but
the response speed is faster than that of the 18CH mode.
• Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the FASSTest 12CH mode.

■ FASST MULTI---FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) canbe used.

■ FASST 7CH--- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.

■ T-FHSS Air--- T-FHSS system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to 18
channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.

■ S-FHSS--- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 81

Trim setting (T1-T6)

Digital trim settings

This function adjusts the digital trim's control
VWHSDPRXQWDQGRSHUDWLRQPRGH 77 

When the flight conditions are set, the trim
operation can be coupled with among all theconditions which combination mode is selected.

ŏ Select [Trim setting] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to LinkagemenuControl step amount setting
1. The [Step] item tap the screen to the data
input mode.
Set the control step amount by tapping the" ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " button.
Initial value: 4Adjustment range: 1~200(When the value is tapped, the control stepamount is reset to the initial value.)*When the value is made large, the change per step becomeslarger.

82 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Separate/combination mode selection[Comb.]: Combination mode. The trim data
are reÁected at all the Áight conditions.
[Separ.]: Separate mode. Trim adjustment foreach Áight condition.

Throttle cut

Stops the engine safely and easily.

Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
HQJLQHE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDW
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
DYRLGDFFLGHQWDOGHDGVWLFNV7KHVZLWFK¶VORFDWLRQ
and direction must be chosen, as it defaults to " −− ".

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

ŏ Tap the [Throttle cut] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

The yellow line is thecut position. Whenthe cut switch is ON,
the throttle will moveto this position.

This is the throttle cut
position. Tapping thiswill display value input
buttons on-screen. Set
the engine stop position.
Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the throttle cut switch
and ON-OFF direction.

Throttle cut setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button.
2. Throttle cut function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the Hardware
select! screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)
3. Throttle cut position setting:
Tap the cut position button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the cut
position rate.

This indicates the throttle stick's current
position. Throttle cut will only function
when the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd
into the slow throttle range.

ŏInitial value: 17ŏAdjustment range:（LOW）0~50（Middle）*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the rate until the engine
consistently shuts off.

To exit the setting, tap the [Throttle cut]
button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 83

Lowers the engine idling speed.

Idle down

The Idle down function lowers the engine's idle
E\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDWLGOH
The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid
DFFLGHQWDOGHDGVWLFNV7KHVZLWFK¶VORFDWLRQDQG
direction must be chosen, as it defaults to " −− ".
ŏ Select [Idle down] at the linkage menu
and call the setup screen shown below.

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

This is the idle down
throttle position. Tapping
this will display value input
buttons on-screen. Set theengine's max. low position.
Range:（↑）-100 〜 +100（↓）
Pressing and holding avalue will reset it to 0.

Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the idle down switch
and ON-OFF direction.

This is the current position bar for thethrottle stick. Throttle cut will only
function when the throttle stick is morethan halfway into the low throttle range.

Idle down setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button to activate the Idle
down function.
2. Idle down function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the Hardware
select! screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)

3. Offset rate setting:
Tap the offset rate button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the offset rate.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: -100~100
 EHFRPHVDQLGOHXS
To exit the setting, tap the [Idle down]
button.

Landing
Idling, lower

Oﬀset rate

84 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Swash ring

Limits the swash travel within a Àxed range to prevent linkage damage(Helicopter only)This function limits the travel of the swash
plate to prevent linkage damage as the aileron and
HOHYDWRURSHUDWLRQLVXVHG,WLVXVHIXOIRU'KHOL
setting.
ŏTap the [Swash ring] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
The movement range
display shows control
input for elevator andaileron direction.

Setting the function to"ACT" will display theswash ring and [Rate]
percentage.

The marker represents
the stick's position.

Swash ring setting procedure
1. Push the Swash ring button on the linkagemenu.
2. Push ACT/INH button to activate.
*The movement area monitor shows the current aileron andelevator values and limit ranges by the yellow circle.

3. Adjust the rate to the maximum amount ofswash plate decline.
*The swash movement is limited within the circle.

Adjustment range: 50 - 200.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 85

SwashSwash operation linkage correction function (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1).

Neutral Point

Mixing Rate

At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates froma perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage
compensation functions in this menu may notcompensate effectively. To correct this use theneutral point function. This will move the neutral
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
SRVLWLRQ +RZHYHU WKLV DGMXVWPHQW FKDQJHV RQO\WKHD[LVSRLQWRIWKHFRPSHQVDWLRQIXQFWLRQVLQWKLV
menu, and does not affect the neutral position ofother functions.

7KLV FRPSHQVDWLRQ PL[LQJ LV XVHG WR FRUUHFWthe tendency of the swash-plate for each control.
7KH IROORZLQJ FRPSHQVDWLRQ PL[LQJ LV SRVVLEOH
PIT to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL,
DQG(/(WR3,7 +5PRGH ,WDGMXVWVWKHVZDVKplate to operate correctly for each control using the
FRUUHVSRQGLQJFRPSHQVDWLRQPL[LQJ

Swash AFR
Swash AFR function reduces/increases/reverses
WKH UDWH WUDYHO  RI WKH DLOHURQ HOHYDWRU DQGcollective pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing
the motion of all servos involved in that function,
only when using that function.

Linkage Compensation
7KLVFRPSHQVDWLRQPL[LQJLVXVHGWRFRUUHFWWKH
tendency of the swash-plate for pitch control at low
pitch and high pitch.
Speed Compensation
This function is used to cancel the reaction that is
generated by the difference of the operation amountof each servo when the swash-plate moves.

ŏ Select [Swash] at the linkage menu and call the
setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

86 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Neutral point setting procedure%HFRPHVWKHFRPSHQVDWLRQUHIHUHQFHSRLQW
*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point position is
QHDUWKHSRVLWLRQPDNHVWKHPL[LQJDPRXQWVPDOO

1. Hold the servo horn at a right angle to thelinkage rod, and then tap the [Enter] button
and read the actual neutral point.
*The neutral point is displayed on the screen.

After reading this neutral point, use othercompensation functions to make further
adjustments.
To exit the setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Swash AFR setting procedure
Adjust so that the specified operation
amount is obtained by aileron, elevator, andpitch operation.
1. Tap the button of the AFR rate to be
adjusted. Value input buttons appear on thescreen.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the AFR
rate.
Initial value: +50
Adjustment range: -100~+100
+or- the direction of operation changes.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Mixing rate setting procedureHR-3 is described as an example. The mixing
applied in other swash modes is different, but
the setting procedure is the same.
1. Set the throttle stick to the set neutral point.
Adjust the length of the linkage rod so thatthe swash plate is hori]ontal at this position.
*A little adjustment using sub trim should be OK.
*Adjust so that pitch operation when the pitch curve
LVVWUDLJKWLVPD[LPXP
2. Adjust the AIL-!PIT amount so there is nointerference in the elevator or pitch direction
when the aileron stick is moved to the left
and right.
*Adjust the left and right sides separately.
3. Adjust the ELE-!AIL and ELE-!PIT amounts sothere is not interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
*Adjust the up and down sides separately.
4. Adjust the PIT-!AIL and PIT-!ELE amounts sothat the swash plate is hori]ontal when thethrottle stick is set to maximum slow and fullhigh.
*Adjust the slow and high sides separately.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Linkage correction setting procedure
6HWWKHOLQNDJHFRPSHQVDWLRQDIWHUVHWWLQJWKHPL[LQJ
rate.
*This function compensates for elevator interferenceby aileron operation or aileron interference by
HOHYDWRU RSHUDWLRQ DW /RZ SLWFK DQG +L SLWFK DW
FROOHFWLYHSLWFK +5HWF FRQWURO
1. Set the throttle stick to the maximum slow
position. Move the aileron stick to the left andright and adjust the aileron compensation
amount so that interference in the elevatoror pitch direction at that time is minimal.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted separately.
*If the interference increases when the compensation
amount is increased, make the compensation
direction "-".
2. Adjust the elevator compensation amountso that the interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down is minimal.
3. Perform aileron and elevator compensation
similarly for the throttle stick full high side.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Speed compensation setting procedure
1. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. Move the elevator stick Tuickly andadjust the speed compensation amount sothat the interference in the pitch direction isminimal.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Notes:
If the linkage is too long or short, correctcompensation will not be applied. Correct
this before continuing. The pitch angle
changes after any adjustment. Reset thepitch angle when actually flying after
compensation processing.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 87

Stick alarm$Q DODUP VLQJOH EHHS  FDQ EH VRXQGHG DW WKH
VSHFL¿HGWKURWWOHVWLFNSRVLWLRQŏAlarm function ON/OFF can be set by switch.
Tapping this will change
INH to ON and activated.

If the throttle stick
reaches the yellow
line, an alarm willsound.

ŏReturn to Linkage menu

This is the current
position display bar
for the throttle stick.

This is the throttle stick
alarm position. Push thethrottle stick to the desired
position and tap the value.
Range:（Low）0 〜 100（High）

Tapping this will pull up the hardware selection
screen. Select the switch and ON-OFF direction if
turning the function ON-OFF by switch.

If the throttle stick
reaches the desired
position , an alarm(single beep) willsound.

88 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Timer setting

Timer

The Timer function may be set forany desired time, i.e. engine run time,
specified times for competitions, etc.
Two independent timers are provided
for your use. The timers are stored
independently with each model, meaningthat when you switch between model
setups, the timer associated with the newmodel is brought up automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stopfrom the motion of any switch or stick.
<RXPD\VHWWKH21DQG2))GLUHFWLRQV
freely. Each timer has a capacity of up toPLQXWHVVHFRQGVEach timer may be set for count-down or count up
operation with a target time.
If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set time, abuzzer sound for each count is generated.

Last twenty seconds Last ten seconds Target timeTime：

Alarm :One shortbeep

Two short
Also
beeps

beep

ŏ Select [Timer] at the linkage menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

Continue counting
with displaying a
minus (-) sign.

Elapsed: Minute-by-minutealarm starting from 00:00

ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Remainder : Minute-byminute alarm counting downfrom a designated time

A Buzzer or Speech
can be chosen[Inhibit] → [Type1-4]
If it carries out like this,a vibration function
will work.

OFF: Turning the power OFF and switching models will reset the timer.
ON: Previous timer is put into memory and will restart from where it stopped.
[Start/Stop] → Home screen
A timer on the home screen starts and stops its
countdown directly from there when tapped.
Tapping and holding the display will reset the timer.

Timer 1

Timer 2Up timer/Down timer selection

Start/Stop/Reset switch setting

1. Tap the mode button and select the type oftimer.
2. Timer time setting.
Tap the Mode minutes or seconds button.
Value input buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to set the timer time.

1. Tap the Start/Stop/Reset SW "--" button tocall the Switch! screen, and then select theswitch and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual. The timer switches
can be set for each condition.)＜ Linkage menu ＞ 89

Integration Timer,17 LQWHJUDWLRQ 7LPHULVWKHIXQFWLRQZKLFKFKDQJHVSURJUHVVRIDWLPHUDFFRUGLQJWRWKHORFDWLRQ
of the throttle stick. When the throttle stick is raised for faster speed, the speed of the timer usually
LQFUHDVHV:LWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDWPLGUDQJHVSHHGWKHWLPHUVSHHGGHFUHDVHV WR :KHQWKH
throttle is positioned at low end, the timer's progress stops. It's possible to set it in the time which¿WVSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQRI\RXUIXVHODJH*The consumption of the battery/fuel is different depending on the conditions, so use an INT Timer as
reference.
*The INT (integration) time is different from the actual elapsed time.

When a throttle stick is thehigh side, the speed of thetimer usually increases.

High
When a throttle stick is
middle-speed, the timer
speed decreases (by 50%).

MiddleWhen a throttle stick is low,timer progress stops.

Lowŏ Select [Timer] at the linkage menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
INT Time◆ Start INT timer
Nomal TimerTap

INT time (%)

TH% : Integration Timer

90 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Function name

Function name can be changed

7KHQDPHRIWKHVSDUHIXQFWLRQV $X[LOLDU\ 
FDQEHFKDQJHGIRUWKHIXOOQDPH FKDUDFWHUV RUIRUWKHDEEUHYLDWHGQDPH FKDUDFWHUV ŏ Tap the [Function name] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Function name change method
1. Select [Function name] from the Linkagemenu and tap the screen.
2. The Function name setup screen is displayed.
3. When the function whose name is to bechanged is selected and the screen istapped, a modiÀcation screen is displayed.
4. Select the function to be renamed andselect [Rename] and tap the screen. A
character input screen is displayed. Input thefunction name.

6. The function name may be displayed in 10
characters or 4 characters, depending on
the setup screen. For 4-character display,
input the function name as reTuired.

5. When [Reset] is selected and the screen isheld down, the function name is set to theinitial state function name.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 91

Telemetry system
This screen displays and sets the various information from the receiver. An alarm and vibration can be
JHQHUDWHGGHSHQGLQJRQWKHLQIRUPDWLRQ)RUH[DPSOHDGURSLQWKHYROWDJHRIWKHUHFHLYHUEDWWHU\KRXVHG
in the aircraft can be reported by an alarm.
● This function can only be used in the FASSTest18CH mode and T-FHSS mode. The FASST/S-FHSS mode cannot use
telemetry.
● FASSTest12CH mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display.
● Telemetry sensors sold separately can be mounted in the aircraft to display a variety of information. (Receiver voltage
does not require a sensor.)● The telemetry function cannot be used if the telemetry mode of the parameters is not ACT.
● FASSTest18CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry cannot be used for the 2nd receiver.
● T-FHSS/FASSTest12CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry function cannot be used.
● If the transmitter and receiver are linked, but the receiver's ID is not recorded in the transmitter's memory, the telemetryfunction cannot be used.
● Turning OFF the receiver after use will cause the telemetry data just prior to this to be displayed. (Even when thereceiver's power is turned OFF, the receiver voltage is not 0.0V.)

Viewing the receiver voltage.

Setting is unnecessary. When menu telemetry islistened to, the voltage appears.

P.92

Viewing the drive battery
voltage.

CA-RVIN-700 and wiring work are necessary.

P.99

Using various optional
telemetry sensors.

Optional telemetry sensors are necessary.
T18SZ setting is unnecessary.

P.94

Using several telemetry
sensors of the same type.

Setting by "sensor" in the menu is necessary.
(Register is necessary.)

P.95

Setting alarms from thetelemetry information.

Setting by "Telemetry" in the menu is necessary.

Viewing the telemetry data
Receiver → Transmitter. The reception of the signal
from the receiver to the transmitter is shown. This
does not aﬀect ﬂight.
Receiver voltage andExt voltage display

CAUTION
Do not stare at or set the transmittersetting screen while ﬂying.
■ Losing sight of the aircraft during ﬂight is very
dangerous.
■ When you want to check the information during
ﬂight, call the telemetry screen before ﬂight andhave the screen checked by someone other thanthe operator.

92 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

P.98 〜 114＜ Home display ＞

Home
display

HOME/EXIT is pushed

4 of telemetry data is displayed*Be aware that pressing and holding this activates the key lockYou can choose
which type of sensor
to display for four
displays. Tap the sensor
type.

For some sensor types,
you can choose thedisplay item. Tap toselect.

76=

Telemetry Schematic
Info

Signal)XVH
Info&$59,1ZLWKH[WHUQDOSRZHULQSXWPXVWEHOHVVWKDQ9

Drive battery

Receiver%UDQFK

0RWRU&RQWUROOHU

Drive battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Info

6%86SRUW

6ZLWFKInfo+XE

7HUPLQDOER[
Info

+XE

7HPSHUDWXUH
6HQVRU

Slot 1530
6HQVRU

Slot 2$OWLWXGH
6HQVRU

Slot 3 〜 5

9ROWDJH
6HQVRU

Slot 6 〜 7*36
6HQVRU

Slot 8 〜 15

6HQVRU

Slot 16
Slot 17

6HQVRUInfo+XE

Slot 31＜ Linkage menu ＞ 93

Various telemetry sensors setting

SensorThis screen registers the telemetry sensors usedwith the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting it
WRWKH6%86SRUWRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
:KHQ XVLQJ  RU PRUH RI WKH VDPH NLQG RI
sensor, they must be registered here.
ŏ Tap the [Sensor] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.

Slot Number[What is a slot?]
6HUYRV DUH FODVVLILHG E\ &+ EXW sensors areclassified in units called “slot”. There are slots from
No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data
sensor units may use multiple slots.
When using a sensor which uses two or more slots,
the required number of slots is automatically assignedby setting up a start slot.
:KHQRUPRUHRIWKHVDPHNLQGRIVHQVRUDUHXVHG
the sensors themselves must allocate unused slots andmemorize that slot.

Registered sensor

Sensor ID : Multiple usage of sensorsof the same type requires an ID
be input. Tapping this will allow
for manual input, but see the next
page about how to perform autoregistration via sensor registration.

Tap the slot to display
sensors which can be used
for the start slot. Tap toregister the sensor.

This is what displays when no
sensor is registered in a slot.
Tapping the slot and selecting"-----------" will erase whatever was
registered there, freeing up theslot.

ŏ As shown in the table below, an altimeter reTuires 3 contiguous slots and a GPS sensor
reTuires 8 contiguous slots. The GPS (SBS-01/02G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24.

＜ Assignable slot ＞$OWLPHWHU*36DQGRWKHUVHQVRUVWKDWGLVSOD\DODUJHDPRXQWRIGDWDUHTXLUHPXOWLSOHVORWV*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.

TEMP (SBS-01T/TE)
RPM (SBS01RM/RO/RB)

The required
number of slots
1 slot1 slotVoltage (SBS-01V)

2 slots

Altitude (SBS-01/02A)

3 slots

Current (SBS-01C)

3 slots

SensorS.BUS Servo sennsor（SBS-01S)
GPS(SBS-01/02G)
TEMP125-F1713

8 slots
1 slotVARIO-F1712

2 slots

VARIO-F1672

2 slots

CURR-F1678

3 slots

GPS-F1675
Kontronik ESC
Castle TL0

8 slots
8 slots
8 slots

JetCat V1014 slots

PowerBox

16 slots

6 slots

94 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

The number which can be used as a start slot
1-31
1-31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,8,9,10,16,17,18,
24,25,26
8,16,24
1-31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
8,16,24
8,16,24
8,16,24
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,
18
8,16

Selling area

GlobalEuropeSensor：Reload

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

When using multiple sensors of the same typethe sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
&RQQHFWDOOWKHVHQVRUVWREHXVHGWRWKH76=DVVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHDWWKHULJKWDQGUHJLVWHUWKHPE\
the following procedure. The ID of each sensor isregistered in the transmitter.

Hub
76=

ŏ Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Hub

Hub

SENSORSENSORSENSORSENSORSENSOR*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likeD70=76*

Reading all the sensors to be used
1. Connect the sensor to the T18SZ as shown in the Àgure above.
2. Tap ´Reloadµ on page 3/3 of the [Sensor] screen.
3. Tap ´Reloadµ.
All the sensors are registered and can be used.

Sensor : Register

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

This function registers an additional sensor.
Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at theright and register it by the following procedure.
The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

76=

SENSORŏ Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.

*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likeD70=76*

Additional sensor registration
1. Connect the sensor to the T18SZ as shown in the figure
above.
2. Tap ´Registerµ on page 3/3 of the Sensor! screen.
3. The sensor is registered and can be used.

*When the number of slots needed inregistration is insufficient, an error isdisplayed and registration cannot be
performed. Disable unused slots or
perform the following reload.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 95

Sensor : Change slot

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensorsof the same type.

This procedure changes the slot number of one
registered sensor.

76=ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

SENSORŏ Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.

*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likeD70=76*

ŏ Tap the [Change slot] buttonin the Sensor screen to call the
setup screen shown below.

)RUVRPHWUDQVPLWWHUV HJ7. ZKHQWKHVWDUWVORWRID
sensor is changed, the sensor cannot be used.

Sensor slot change
1. Connect the sensor to the T18SZ as shown inthe Àgure above.
2. Tap ´Change slotµ on page 3/3 of theSensor! screen.
3. Tap ´Readµ.
4. A sensor details screen appears.
5. The current start slot is displayed. To changea start slot, a ＋ Ɇ button, tap.（Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like thetable of all pages.）
6. Tap to the ´Writeµ.

WARNING
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter
power OFF while telemetry sensor data
is being saved.
Sensor save data will be lost, resulting in
malfunction.

96 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Telemetry

Displaying data from the receiverThis screen displays your choice of data from thereceiver.
Also warnings can be activated regarding the
GDWD)RUH[DPSOHLIWKHUHFHLYHUYROWDJHGURSVWKH
XVHUFDQEHZDUQHGE\DQDODUP DQGYLEUDWLRQ ŏ Tap the [Telemetry] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Tap page button toadvance to next page.
( The number of pages
changes with the numberof sensor registration.)

Various telemetry data
Start slot number

Choose the desired sensor and tap.

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Display Sensors
Default display sensors can only be used byconnecting the sensors to the receiver. For displayof other sensors or to use the same type of sensor in
multiple cases, either register them via the "Sensor"
option on the Linkage menu or allocate the sensors
to empty slots to have them display on the Telemetry
VFUHHQ 5HIHU WR WKH SUHYLRXV 6HQVRU H[SODQDWLRQ
pages for how to do this.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 97

Displaying data from thereceiver battery voltage

Telemetry: Receiver [Battery]In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver isdisplayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Receiver battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

98 ＜ Linkage menu ＞"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

Displaying data from the EXT
battery voltage port

Telemetry: Receiver [Ext. battery]
The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data from
WKH(;7EDWWHU\RXWSXWIURPWKH56%UHFHLYHU
In order to use this function, it is necessary to
FRQQHFWH[WHUQDOYROWDJHFRQQHFWRURIWKH56%
UHFHLYHU WR D &$59,1 )870  RU
6%69WRWKHEDWWHU\\RXGHVLUHWRPHDVXUHWKH
voltage of the EXT-battery.

*CA-RVIN-700 must be installed in the aircraft.
You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if
WKHYROWDJHVHWE\\RXLVH[FHHGHG
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 99

Displaying data from the temperature

Telemetry : Temperature*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
Temperature is a screen which displays/sets*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used inup the temperature information from an optional)$667HVW&+PRGH
temperature sensor.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\
7KHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHPRGHO HQJLQHPRWRU
functions.
EDWWHU\HWF ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHGLVSOD\HG
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
ŏ Tap the [Temperature] button in the Telemetry
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Temperature

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature rises
above the set value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature drops
below the set value.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alert set : Temperature warning
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [℃ ] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń100℃ Ņ0℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ ~200℃(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

100 ＜ Linkage menu ＞"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

Displaying data from the rpm

Telemetry : RPM Sensor
The RPM Sensor screen is used to set up an
optional rpm sensor and display the rotation
information it transmits.
7KHURWDWLRQRIWKHPRGHO HQJLQHPRWRUHWF 
ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHVKRZQIf it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

*An rpm sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Tap the [rpm sensor] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

rpm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm rises above the set
value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm falls below the set
value.

Sets the rpm on which
the alarm operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

"Magnet""Optics""Brushless motor"

SBS-01RM → Gear ratio 1.00~99.00
SBS-01RO → Blade
2~10
SBS-01RB → Pole
2~30

Alarm set : Over (Under) rotations
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx rpm] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń 2,000rpm Ņ 0rpm
Adjustment range: 0rpm~150,000rpm(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 101

Displaying data from the altitude

Telemetry : Altitude*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

Altitude is a screen which displays / sets up the altitude
LQIRUPDWLRQIURPDQRSWLRQDODOWLWXGHVHQVRURU*36VHQVRU
7KHDOWLWXGHRIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHNQRZQ,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHU ORZ WKDQSUHVHWDOWLWXGH\RXFDQEHWROGE\alarm. Warning by vibration can also be chosen. Data when
DSRZHUVXSSO\LVWXUQHGRQVKDOOEHPDQGLWGLVSOD\VWKH
altitude which changed from there. Even if the altitude of an
DLU¿HOGLVKLJKWKDWVKDOOEHPDQGWKHDOWLWXGHGLIIHUHQFH
from an airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates thealtitude from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure
will get lower as you go up in altitude. Using this, thesensor will estimate the altitude. Please understand that an
H[DFWDGYDQFHGGLVSOD\FDQQRWEHSHUIRUPHGLIDWPRVSKHULF
pressure changes in a weather situation.
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Tap the [Altitude] button in the Telemetry screen tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Altitude

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Sets the altitude
on which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches above
your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a diﬀerent melody.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches below
your set value.

Mode1: Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Mode4: Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensible
Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

First, the set of a reference is required.

Alarm set : Altitude

1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx m] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń200m Ņ-50m
Adjustment range -500m~+3,000m(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
DOVRDWWKHVDPHDLU¿HOG<RXVKRXOGSUHVHWEHIRUHDÀLJKW"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

102 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Displaying data from thevariometer

Telemetry : Altitude [Variometer]*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up theVWDWXVWKH76=LQFRUSRUDWHVDGLIIHUHQWPHORG\variometer information from an optional altitude
for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending
VHQVRURU*36VHQVRU
upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary to
7KHYDULRPHWHURIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQ indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing ordescending at a rapid rate.
be known.
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used inalarm and/or vibration will alert you.
)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model'sŏ Tap the [Variometer] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.

functions.

ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

VariometerMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Sets the variometeron which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
below your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a diﬀerent melody.
Mode 1 : Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

First, the set of a reference is required.
1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
DOVRDWWKHVDPHDLU¿HOG<RXVKRXOGSUHVHWEHIRUHDÀLJKW"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1Mode 4 : Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensible

Alert set : variometer
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [m/s] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: +1m
Adjustment range-50m/s~+50m/s(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)

Type 2*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 103

Vario Melody Setting

Tap the [Set] button

Current variometer*These settings can bemade for each sensor.

Next page

Deadband

Range

When the variometer is greaterthan this value, Vario melody is
not variable.
Setting range：
Offset value 〜 +50m/s
Initial value：5.0m/s

When the variometer is less than
this value, Vario melody is notvariable.
Setting range：-50m/s 〜 Offset value
Initial value：-5.0m/s

When the variometer is lessthan this value, Vario melody
is not output.
Setting range：0m/s 〜 +50m/s
Initial value：0.0m/s

When the variometer isgreater than this value, Vario
melody is not
output.
Setting range：-50m/s 〜 0m/s
Initial value：0.0m/s

OﬀsetžŷƋƈŃƕƈƏƄƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃŹƄƕƌƒŃŰƈƏƒƇƜŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊƖƀ
Fixed melody
Range↑
Deadband↑Oﬀset

This is the changing point of climb and sink. When the variometeris greater than this value, Vario Melody is climb type. When thevariometer is less than this value, Vario Melody is sink type.
Setting range：Range Ń setting value 〜 Range Ņ setting value
Initial value：0.0m/s

104 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Deadband↓Variable melody
Dead band（Not sound）

Variable melody

Range↓
Fixed melody

Climb side
Discontinuous
soundsSink side
Continuous
soundsDelayThe output vario melody does not change during
the delay time. In other words, this is a minimum
time of Vario melody output.
Setting range：0.0 s，0.5 s，1.0 s，1.5 s
Initial value：0.0 s*This parameter is effective to all variometers.

žŹƄƕƌƒŃŰƈƏƒƇƜŃŧƈƏƄƜƀ
Actually Variometer
0.0m/s

1.0m/s

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/s

Output Vario Melody
0.0m/s

1.0m/s

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/s

Delay time
1.0s

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 105

Displaying data from the receiver battery voltage

Telemetry: Voltage [Battery]*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver isdisplayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed.
In order to use this function, it is necessary to
FRQQHFW([WHUQDOYROWDJHFRQQHFWRURI56% ⇔
6%69 ⇔%DWWHU\
6%69 PHDVXUHV WZR EDWWHULHV7KH SRZHU
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXT92/77KHEDWWHU\IRUUHFHLYHUVFRQQHFWHGWR3
lines is displayed here.
ŏ Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.

,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Battery voltage

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

＜ Two examples of wiring are shown ＞
Two drive batteries are measured (R7008SB use)

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er,
Voice, and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using
the vibrator alarm. If using vibrator,choose one of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0V] item .
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ""ʆʆ" buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return tothe original state, push the HOME/EXIT
button.
5HIHU WR WKH PDQXDO RI 6%69 IRU WKH GHWDLOV RI
wiring.

106 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)WR6%86
SRUW

Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)

EXT Line

Normal Line56%

Receiver battery●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]

Two drive batteries and power supplies for servos are measured (R7008SB use)
Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)
Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)
Power supplies
for servos*SBS-01V measures two voltage. One corresponds to high voltages, such as a drive battery,with an EXT line. Another is a normal line and is measurement of the battery for receivers of aline connected to 3P connector, or the battery for servos.

EXT Line

6ZLWFK

Normal LineWR6%86SRUW$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\+XE

56%

Receiver battery
S.BUS2

servos●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7008SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]
●The voltage for servos is measured in a power supply line [SBS-01V use]D i s pl a y i n g d a t a f r o m t h e E XT
battery voltage port

Telemetry: Voltage [Ext. battery]In this screen, the EXT battery voltage isdisplayed. In order to use this function, it is
QHFHVVDU\WRFRQQHFW([WHUQDOYROWDJHFRQQHFWRURI
56% ⇔6%69 ⇔%DWWHU\
6%69 PHDVXUHV WZR EDWWHULHV7KH SRZHU
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT.

*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen tocall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap Limit [4.0V].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 107

Displaying data from the Distance Screen

Telemetry : GPS [Distance]
The Distance screen displays and sets altitude
GDWD IURP DQ 6%6* *36 6HQVRU VROGVHSDUDWHO\ DQGDOORZVWKHGLVWDQFHWRWKHDLUERUQH
aircraft to be read by the transmitter. When theaircraft flies inside or outside the set distance, an
alarm and vibration alerts the pilot.

*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
7KH *36 VHQVRU LV QHFHVVDU\ DQG LV VROG VHSDUDWHO\ 0RXQW
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Distance
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
below your set value.

Sets the distanceon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference"
item. Sets the current aircraft position
as the starting point.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Altitude calculated as either straight line distance(slant) or surface distance on a map can also be
selected.

Type 1
Type 2nt

Sla

AltitudeType 3

Surface
Select <Slant> <Surface> to "Distance mode", tap thescreen.

108 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

First, the set of a reference is required.

Setting a "too close" alarm distance

1. The model and transmitter to which the GPS
sensor was connected are turned on.

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.

2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.

1RZWKHSRVLWLRQRIWKHSUHVHQWPRGHOZDVVHWWRP

Setting a "too far" alarm distance
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.

3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 0m
Adjustment range 0m~3,000m(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)

3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 1,000m*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

Adjustment range 0m~3,000m(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

TelemetryDataŧƌƖƗƄƑƆƈ
*Positioning time of GPS:KHQSRZHUHGXSWKH6%6*EHJLQVWRDFTXLUH *36 VDWHOOLWH GDWD 7KLV SURFHVV FDQtake several minutes. Please do not move themodel during this process. During acquisition,
WKH/('RQWKH6%6*ZLOOEOLQNJUHHQafter the satellite's signals have been acquired,
WKH/('ZLOOEHFRPHVROLGJUHHQDQGWKH*36
signal strength display on the transmitter willshow three bars.
Moving the model before the satellites are fullyacquired will cause a delay in acquiring thesatellite signal.
＜ Linkage menu ＞ 109

Displaying data from the speed

Telemetry : GPS [Speed]

The speed screen displays and sets the speed data from an *A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

6%6* *36VHQVRU VROGVHSDUDWHO\
7KHVSHHGRIWKHDLUFUDIWGXULQJÀLJKWFDQEHGLVSOD\HG
$IWHU IOLJKW WKH PD[LPXP VSHHG GXULQJ IOLJKW FDQ EH
YLHZHG%HFDXVHWKLVVSHHGLVEDVHGRQSRVLWLRQGDWDIURPD *36 VDWHOOLWH WKH JURXQG VSHHG LV GLVSOD\HG LQVWHDG RI
air speed. Consequently, with a head wind, the displayed
speed decreases and with a tail wind, the displayed speed
increases.

7KH *36 VHQVRU LV QHFHVVDU\ DQG LV VROG VHSDUDWHO\ 0RXQW
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Speed↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.

Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Reference and Distance mode work in conjunction
with Distance discussed on the previous two pages.

"Vibrator" type
Alarm setting when speed increases
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Bu]]er, Voice, andInhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
4. Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: Ń200km/h Ņ0km/h
Adjustment range 0km/h~500km/h(ŃLimit ≧ ŅLimit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the originalstate, push the HOME/EXIT button.

110 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*Speed alarm precaution
6LQFH WKH *36 VSHHG VHQVRU GLVSOD\V WKH JURXQG VSHHG LW
FDQQRWEHXVHGDVDVWDOODODUP)RUH[DPSOHDQDLUFUDIWWKDWVWDOOVDWNPKZLOOVWDOOLIWKHWDLOZLQGLVNPKRUJUHDWHU
HYHQ WKURXJK NPK LV GLVSOD\HG E\ JURXQG VSHHG ,Q
DGGLWLRQZLWKDQDLUFUDIWWKDWZLOOGLVLQWHJUDWHLQPLGÀLJKWDW
NPKDWDQRYHUVSHHGDODUPZKHQWKHKHDGZLQGUHDFKHVNPKWKHDLUSODQHZLOOGLVLQWHJUDWHLQPLGDLUGXHWRRYHU
VSHHGLQJHYHQDWDJURXQGVSHHGRINPKTelemetry : GPS [Altitude, Variometer, Position]*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
The Altitude, Variometer, Position screen
GLVSOD\V DQG VHWV WKH GDWD IURP DQ 6%6*
*36VHQVRU VROGVHSDUDWHO\
7KH *36 VHQVRU LV QHFHVVDU\ DQG LV VROG VHSDUDWHO\ 0RXQW
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.

,WFDQQRWEHXVHGLQ)$667PRGHDQG6)+66PRGH
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in)$667HVW&+PRGH
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ Select [GPS] in the Telemetry screen andaccess the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Altitude
Variometer

Refer to the former
page for a setup
about Altitude andVariometer.

This indicates thereceiving accuracy
from a GPS Satellite.
When three bars are
displayed, the GPS isready for use.

The position of the present
model is displayed.

ŤƏƗƌƗƘƇƈ
ŹƄƕƌƒƐƈƗƈƕ

ƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑ

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 111

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Current]
7KH 6%66 FDQ PRQLWRU DQG GLVSOD\ WKH *Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
in-flight current, operating angle, and internal
WHPSHUDWXUHRIXSWRWZR6%86VHUYRV
If you forget to connect the servo wiring during
fuselage assembly, or the servo was disconnected,
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.
Tap here and go to theServo 2 settings page.
(Display and settingscontent is the same as
Servo 1.)

ŏ Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this willtake you to thesettings screen forthe current alarm

Tapping this and selecting"Buzzer" will cause the device
to sound an alarm when
servos are not connected.

Tapping this and selecting"Each type" will cause thedevice to vibrate when servos
are not connected.

When the Alarm or
Vibrator options areactivated, the servo
connection will
display.
*This alarm and display is limited to the S.BUS
servos connected to the servo sensors.
↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

112 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator is choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

Initial value: ↑ 10.0A ↓ 0.0A
Adjustment range 0.0A~10.0A( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Temperature] [Angle]*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
ŏ Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

● Temperature↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
below your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

Initial value: ↑ 115℃↓ -10℃
Adjustment range -10℃ ~115℃( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)● Angle↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the angle onwhich the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

Initial value: ↑ +180.0° ↓ -180.0°
Adjustment range -180.0° ~ +180.0°( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)＜ Linkage menu ＞ 113

Telemetry : Current sensor [Current]
7KH 6%6& KDV WKH FDSDELOLW\ RI PHDVXULQJFXUUHQWYROWDJHDQGFDSDFLW\ FRQVXPSWLRQ IURP
drive battery all at the same time.

*Current sensor must be installed in theaircraft.

'ULYH

(6&

%DWWHU\

0RWRU
WR5HFHLYHU

6%6&ŏ Select [Current] in the Telemetry screen andaccess the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thecurrent alarm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thevoltage alarm
Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for the
consumption capacity alarm
The consumption capacity is indicated.
It isn't the present battery capacity.

◆ Alarm setting↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

"Vibrator" type
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3114 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Tele. setting

Speech interval set , data logging of telemetry.

Set the speech interval of telemetry data, and thelogging of telemetry data to an SD card at chosenintervals.
Telemetry data can be checked on your PC afterDÀLJKWŏ Tap the [Tele.setting] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
Sets the speech intervalŏReturn to
Linkage menu

Initial value: 0 sec.
Adjustment range 0-30 sec.

Telemetry data log function
Telemetry data has been adapted to the log function which is recorded at the SD card.
【Setting method】① Open the linkage menu Tele. setting screen.
② Log recording can be started and stopped by operating a switch. The Logging switch is selected.
③ The log output interval can be set.
* The data to be recorded is updated at the time set by Linkage menu → System Type screen D/L interval. For
example, when the log output interval is 1 second and the D/L interval is 2 seconds the same data is overlapped andrecorded twice.
【Operation method】① Insert the SD card into the card slot.
② Set the switch set by Log Start/Stop Switch to ON. A beep sounds and a log ﬁle is created and recording of thetelemetry data begins.

Absolutely never remove the SD card while log data is being recorded.
③ Set the switch set by Logging switch to OFF. A beeping sound is generated and recording of the telemetry data stops.
④ Turn off the transmitter power and remove the SD card.
■ Log ﬁleA log ﬁle is created in the SD card LOG folder. Two ﬁles with the same ﬁlename, but a different extension are created.
(Example: 00001234.FLI, 00001234.FLD)■ Extension FLI: Slot allocation information ﬁle■ Extension FLD: Log data ﬁle*When copying or moving a log ﬁle, always select both the .FLI ﬁle and .FLD ﬁle.
Log ﬁles can be converted to CSV format by using the telemetry log converter available at the Futaba website.
■ Notes◇ Altimeter altitude data and GPS distance and altitude data output with the point that time logging started as thereference (0m). When the transmitter preset position and the log start position are different, the transmitter display
and the log data display will also be different. The altitude and distance from the take-off position can be recorded bystarting logging immediately after take-off.
◇ The transmitter gear ratio or number of ﬁns setting is not reﬂected in the speedometer log data (speed). Multiply thegear ratio or number of ﬁns by the speed data.
◇ When the SD card becomes full, recording stops and does not resume even if logging is restarted.

＜ Linkage menu ＞ 115

Telemetry Alarm Duration and Repeat time
The repeat time and duration time for the telemetry alarm (buzzer, vibration and speech) can be set.

ŏ Tap the [Telemetry Setting] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.

Duration is not displayed when
Repeat is INH.

Duration
It is an alarm output time.
Setting range：1 s 〜 30 s
Initial value：INH

Repeat
It is a repeat time of an alarm
output.
Setting range：INH，1 s 〜 240 s
Initial value：INH

Duration value has to be less than
repeat value.
Duration time is extended when theother alarm event occurs.

žŧƘƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃŵƈƓƈƄƗŃƗƌƐƈŃƉƒƕŃŷƈƏƈƐƈƗƕƜŃŤƏƄƕƐƀ
e.g. Repeat time is 8 seconds and Duration time is 5 seconds.
Repeat time 8s
Alarm
outputON
Duration time 5s

116 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Trainer system starting and setting

Trainer76=WUDLQHUV\VWHPPDNHVLWSRVVLEOHIRUWKH
instructor to choose which channels and operation
modes can be used in the student's transmitter.
The function and rate of each channel can be set.
The training method can also be matched to thestudent's skill level. Two transmitters must beconnected by an optional Trainer Cord, and theInstructor's transmitter should be programmed fortrainer operation, as described below.
When the Instructor activates the trainer switch,
WKH VWXGHQW KDV FRQWURO RI WKH DLUFUDIW LI 0,;
)81&1250 PRGH LV WXUQHG RQ WKH ,QVWUXFWRU
FDQPDNHFRUUHFWLRQVZKLOHWKHVWXGHQWKDVFRQWURO 
When the switch is released the Instructor regains
control. This is very useful if the student gets theaircraft into an undesirable situation.
ŏ Setting data are stored to model data.
ŏ Student rate can be adjusted at MIX/FUNC/NORM mode.
ŏ Activated student channels can be selectedby switches.

Note: This trainer system can be used in the following
manner: :LWK WKH 76= WUDQVPLWWHU DQG D FRQYHQWLRQDOtransmitter, if the channel order is different, it isnecessary to match the channel order before using thisfunction.
You can select the channel of input data from student's
WUDQVPLWWHULQWKH)81&RU0,;PRGH
:KHQWKH76=LVXVHGDVWKHLQVWUXFWRU¶VWUDQVPLWWHUVHWWKHPRGXODWLRQPRGHRIWKHVWXGHQW¶VWUDQVPLWWHUWR
PPM.
 ,IEHLQJXVHGDVWKHVWXGHQW76=FDQEHFRQQHFWHGWR
the instructor's transmitter which requires the student's
PRGHWREH33076=DOZD\VVHQGV330PRGHVLJQDO
from the trainer jack.
 ,QWKHFDVHRIVWXGHQW VWUDQVPLWWHUVRWKHUWKDQ*+] %H VXUH WKDW DOO FKDQQHOV ZRUN FRUUHFWO\ LQ ERWKWUDQVPLWWHUVEHIRUHÀ\LQJ

Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:
Types of transmitters
Instructor

Student

T18SZ,FX-32
T18SZ,FX-32
T14SG,T16SZ,T18MZ T14SG,T16SZ,T18MZ

Instructor's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeArbitrary

Student's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeMod. mode

16CH

Arbitrary

16CH
12CH

PPM

Trainer Cords

T12FG (FUTM4405)
and 9C (FUTM4415)
Trainer Cords

T18SZ

T14MZ, FX-40, T12Z,
T12FG,
FX-30

Arbitrary

12CH

PCM-G3
2.4G

T18SZ

T8FG, FX-20

Arbitrary

12CH
8CH

FASST-MLT2
FASST-MULT--

Arbitrary

8CH

PPM

-

-

T12FG (FUTM4405)

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary--

T12FG (FUTM4405)

T10-, T8-, T6K, T6-,
T6L

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary

-

-

T18SZ

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

T18SZ

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

T18SZ

Arbitrary-

Arbitrary

8CH

-

T18SZ
T18SZ
T18SZ
T14MZ, FX-40, T12Z,
T12FG,
FX-30
T8FG, FX-20
T10C, T10CG, T10-,
T9C, T7C
T7C, T8-, T6K
T6-

T10C, T9C,
T7C,T6EX, T4EX
T10CG,T7C

T12FG (FUTM4405)
and 9C (FUTM4415)
Trainer Cords＜ Linkage menu ＞ 117

ŏ Tap the [Trainer] button in the Linkage menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

When using at the student side

When using at the teacher side

1. Select the mode.

1. Select the mode.

*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want to
FKDQJHDQGFKDQJHWKHPRGHXVLQJWKHźźźŸŸŸEXWWRQV7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV7DSWKHVFUHHQWRFKDQJH
the mode.

*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want to
FKDQJHDQGFKDQJHWKHPRGHXVLQJWKHźźźŸŸŸEXWWRQV7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV7DSWKHVFUHHQWRFKDQJH
the mode.

"Teacher/Student": Select [Student].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[ACT].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the
T18SZ,T14SG,T18SZ,T18MZ, select [16CH]. Whenthe student uses the T14MZ, T12Z, T12FG or FX40, select [12CH]. Otherwise select [8CH].

"Teacher/Student": Select [Teacher].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[OFF] or [ON].
"16/12/8 CHANNEL": When the student uses
the T18SZ (including the T18MZ, T14SG) select[16CH]. Otherwise select [12CH]or[8CH].

Note: In "student mode", only the teacherside can turn on and off the power to thestudent's transmitter. Keep the power switch
always at off position.

2. Select the trainer switch.
:KHQVHWWLQJRUFKDQJLQJWKHVZLWFKWDSWRWKH6:,7&+
item, call the switch setup screen and set the desired switch
DQG212))GLUHFWLRQ

6HH 6ZLWFK VHOHFWLRQ PHWKRG DW WKH HQG RI WKLVPDQXDOIRUVHOHFWLRQPHWKRGGHWDLOV*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the21SRVLWLRQRQWKHVZLWFKVHWXSVFUHHQ:KHQ>1RUPDO@LV
VHOHFWHG QRUPDO 212)) RSHUDWLRQ LV SHUIRUPHG:KHQ
[Alternate] is selected, the trainer function is alternately
turned on and off each time the switch is operated. This
DOORZVDOWHUQDWH212))VZLWFKLQJHYHQZKHQDPRPHQWDU\VZLWFK 6+ LVXVHG

Note: The trainer function won·t be turnedon unless the Instructor's transmitter receives
signals from the student's transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting yourtrainer cable.

118 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

3. Select the operating mode for each channel.

Trainer student channel setting function
In training mode, the instructor's transmitter canpick up the student's signal on both the "Function"
DQG 0L[ FKDQQHOV7KDW PDNHV LW HDV\ IRU WKH
two transmitters to connect even if the student andinstructor have set up their transmitters differently.
:KHQWKHLQVWUXFWRU VWUDQVPLWWHUPRGHLVVHWWR1250
the signal of the same channel of the student's transmitter is
RXWSXWDVLV 7KHVDPHDVEHIRUH "NORM": The model is controlled by signals
from the student transmitter.
"MIX" mode: The model is controlled bysignals from the teacher and student
transmitters. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)"FUNC" mode (function mode):
The model is controlled by signals fromthe student transmitter with the teacher
AFR setting. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)"OFF": Only the teacher side operates.
*The setting above allows setting of the servo throw relative
to the amount of student side operation when [MIX] or>)81&@ZDVVHOHFWHG

When changing the rate, use the "ʈʈ" "ʈ""ʆ" "ʆʆ" button to Tap the [Rate] item of
the channel.
Setting range: -100~+100
Initial value: +100
*When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initial value.

4. Set the switch of each channel.
*When setting the switch at each channel, tap to the "SW"item of the channel you want to change, call the switch
setup screen, and select the switch.

"--" : Always ON.
"SA"~"SH": The switch which enables student
side operation can be selected. (See "Switch
selection method" at the end of this manual
for selection method details.)＜ Linkage menu ＞ 119

Mixing warning normal reset

Warning setting
7KHZDUQLQJGLVSOD\DWSRZHU21FDQEHWXUQHG
212))IRUHDFKIXQFWLRQ8VHE\VHWWLQJIXQFWLRQVZKLFKPD\EHGDQJHURXVLIRSHUDWHGDWSRZHU21
WR21,QLWLDOVHWWLQJLVDOO21 %X]]HU ŏ Tap the [Warning setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to
Linkage menu

The settings can be changed
individually. When set to[Inhibit], a warning is not
displayed at power ON.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3WARNING
It is extremely dangerous tounnecessarily inhibit essential
warnings.
■Careless spinning of propellers or rotors poses a
danger of serious injury or death.

120 ＜ Linkage menu ＞

Original menu screen making

User menu setting
76=KDVDPHQXIRUHDFKRIWKHIROORZLQJ
System, Linkage, and Model. Also, you cancreate a personalized User menu that can include
all of the menus that you use most often.

*Any change made to data entered from the User menu orfrom the normal method of use are the same. Changes madein either way are saved into the transmitter memory.

ŏ Tap the [User menu setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Tap here to selectyour ﬁrst choice.

Once pressed, 3 pages of choices will be displayed.

When "---" is chosen,
it can be deleted.

Make your selection, press your choice and theﬁrst of your "User menu" will be entered.

How to call a User menu
1. From the home screen, press the U.MENU/MON. button.

From the home
screenHOME
screenPress the U.MENU/MON.

Function can becalled by a tap＜ Linkage menu ＞ 121

Data reset

Model memory setting data reset. (by item)

This function is designed to allow you to reset
selected portions or all of the settings saved in
the active model memory. You may individuallychoose to reset the following sets of data:
Trim (All condition):

Model menu setting:Resets all the functions in the Model menu
H[FHSWFRQGLWLRQVHOHFWAll model setting:Reset the digital trim setting.

Resets all Linkage and Model menu functions
H[FHSWIRUIUHTXHQF\PRGHOVHOHFWDQGPRGHOW\SH*All the conditions, or the condition currently being displayed
WKHHQWLUHJURXSIRUJURXSVHWWLQJ FDQEHVHOHFWHG
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.

Function Name:

Trim (Current and Group condition):A function name is reset.
Telemetry:

Reset the digital trim setting.

Reset the telemetry setting.

*Current condition, group condition, can be selected.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.

ŏ Select [Data reset] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Linkage menu

Data resetting method
1. Tap to the item you want to reset and tap
the screen.
$FRQ¿UPDWLRQPHVVDJHDSSHDUV

2. Execute reset by tapping the "Yes".

[Trim (All condition)]: Resets only the Trim (allconditions)[Trim(Current and Group condition)]: Resets
only the data of Trim (condition in use and all
the conditions set to group mode)[Model menu setting]: Resets all the functionsin the model menu, except the condition
selection functions.
[All model setting]: Resets all the functions in
the linkage menu and model menu except
the freTuency, model select, and modeltype functions.
[Function name]: Resets only the function
name functions.
[Telemetry]: Resets only the teremetryfunctions.

CAUTIONCAUTION

Never engage the Data reset function
while the engine is starting or the
motor drive wiring is connected.

Throttle Reverse■ Sudden, abrupt spinning of propellers or rotors
is extremely dangerous.

122 ＜ Linkage menu ＞■ Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is
REV (reverse). Thoroughly check the Hi and Low
directions of the engine or motor used and be
careful that they do not suddenly run at fullspeed. Even after data reset, CH3 is reversed.

MODEL MENU (Common functions)This section describes the AFR, program mixing,
and other functions common to all model types.
Before setting the model data, use the Model
Type function of the Linkage menu to select themodel type matched to the fuselage. When anothermodel type is selected thereafter, the AFR, program
mixing, and other setting data are reset.
The functions in the Model menu can be set foreach flight condition. When you want to use thesystem by switching the settings for each conditionby switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition

Select function to add flight conditions. (Up to 8
conditions can be used)
Note: The T18SZ is designed so that the airplane andglider model types are compatible with aircraft ofsimilar type wings.
This section outlines the relationship between thefunctions common to airplanes and gliders, except
some dedicated functions, and model type.
The setting items depend on the number of servos
and other differences according to the wing typeused, but reread them. The setup screens in the
instruction manual are typical examples.

Tap this icon to
go to the modelmenu.

ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

(Model menu screen example)*The Model menu screen
depends on the model type.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋŦƒƐƐƒƑŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
[Servo monitor]: Displays the servo test and operation positionĺLinkage menu referring[Condition select]: Flight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay canbe set.
[AFR]: Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.
[Dual rate]: D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.
[Program. mixes]: Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for eachcondition.

＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞ 123

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

The functions in the Model menu can be used byswitching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
E\XVLQJWKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKW
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition
select function, this setting is unnecessary. In thiscase, use the flight conditions assigned at initial
setting.
ŏ Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
ŏ A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated

when there are sudden changes in the servo
positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
ŏ When multiple conditions were set, theiroperation priority can be freely changed.
ŏ The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easilyconÀrmed.

ŏ Select [Condition select] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to theconditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

124 ＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)

Last condition has
the highest priority● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
ŏInitial value: 0ŏAdjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞ 125

AFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]

AFR function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
IXQFWLRQVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ

Rate

100%

ŏ Operation curve adjustment: Three typesof curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
ŏ Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

Rate

40%

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QG3RLQWKDVGH¿QHG
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied fromone channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting theoperation rate through the AFR function.

ŏ Select [AFR] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curveŏReturn to Model menu

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)

126 ＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞

Dual rate

100%

D/R curves which can be switched by switch,etc. can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
ŏ Up to 6 rates can be added for eachcondition.
ŏ D/R is set for each condition and is notreÁected at other conditions.
ŏ D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.

40%

ŏ Select [Dual rate] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞ 127

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customi]ed. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correctundesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
EHXVHGIRUXQXVXDOFRQWUROFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV0L[LQJ
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of themixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim
added to the Slave channel response, if you desire("Trim" setting). The mixing curve can be changed
so that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
effectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.

Offset-type mixing applies a fixed offset orpreset to the programmed channel servo operationand may control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerfullink function, which allows Programmable mixing
to be linked with the special mixing functions, orwith other programmable mixing functions. The
link function can be set up for Master and Slave
channel individually.

ŏ Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or oﬀset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Oﬀset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.
Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.
Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

128 ＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞

Fine tuning trim
setting

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

Setting methodsŏGroup/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.

ŏMixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Offset modes.

ŏTrim mode ON/OFF setting
1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]and [OFF].
*This is effective when the master channel is set by Function.

ŏMixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.
*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

ŏMixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

ŏFine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the <Switch> screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]and [ON/OFF].

)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKH¿QHWXQLQJWULPVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH
the description at the back of this manual.

ŏMixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switchingŏServo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.

*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.

ŏMaster channel setting (except offset typemixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.

*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In andSpeed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate atstarting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.

*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and othersimple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button andthen select master channel side control.

ŏSlave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).

＜ Model menu (Common Functions) ＞ 129

MODEL MENU (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter functions)
The dedicated mixes, etc. usable when airplaneor glider model type is selected are displayedin this Model menu functions section. First use
the Model type function of the Linkage menu topreset the model type, wing type, and tail typematched to the fuselage used. Other settings reset
the data used in mixing function, etc.
These dedicated mixes can be set for eachflight condition, as required. When you want to
use the system by switching the settings for eachcondition by switch or stick position, use the&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV(Up to 8 conditions can be used)
Note: The T18SZ is designed so that the airplane andglider model types can handle aircraft of the samewing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders,
except some dedicated functions, are summarized
without regard to the model type.
The setting items are different, depending on thenumber of servos, etc. according to the wing typeused. The setup screens in the instruction manual
are typical examples.

Tap this icon to
go to the modelmenu.

ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

(Model menu screen example)*The Model menu screen
depends on the model type.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒŪƏƌƇƈƕŒŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
Aileron differentialAILĺ Brake ÀapThis function adjusts the left and right ailerons.
5ROOD[LVFRUUHFWLRQDQG¿QHWXQLQJZLWKD95DUHDOVR
possible. This is convenient when making settings
GXULQJÀLJKW
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

This mix operates the brake flaps in the aileronmode. It improves the operation characteristic of the
UROOD[LV>$LUSODQHJOLGHUÀDSVRUPRUH@

Flap setting
The flaps can be adjusted independently. For a 4
flaps model, the camber flaps can be mixed with the
EUDNHÀDSV>$LUSODQHJOLGHUÀDSVRUPRUH@

AIL → Camber ÀapThis mix operates the camber flaps in the aileronmode. It improves the operation characteristic of the
UROOD[LV>$LUSODQHJOLGHUDLOHURQVÀDSVRUPRUH@

Aileronĺ RudderThis mix is used when you want to operate therudder at aileron operation. Banking at a shallow bankangle is possible. [Airplane/glider, general]

ElevatorĺCamberThis mix is used when you want to the mix camber
flaps with elevator operation. Lifting force can beincreased at elevators up. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or
more]

130 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Camber mixing

Air brake

This mix adjusts the camber and corrects theelevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

This function is used when airbrakes are necessary
when landing or when diving, etc. during flight.
[Airplane, general]

Airbrakeĺ ELE
This mix is used to correct operation of the airbrakes(spoilers) when landing. [Airplane/glider, general]

Camber ÀapĺELE
This mix is used to correct for attitude changes when
the camber flaps are being used. [Airplane/glider, 2
DLOHURQVÀDSRUPRUH@

RudderĺAileronThis function is used to correct roll knife edge, etc.
of stunt planes. [Airplane/glider, general]

Gyro
This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro isused. [Airplane/glider/multicopter, general]

Ailevator
This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons ofmodels with elevator specifications. [Airplane/glider,
HOHYDWRUVSHFL¿FDWLRQV@

Acceleration

RudderĺElevator

Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden(OHYDWRU(OHYDWRUĺ&DPEHUDQG$LOĺ5XGGHU>*OLGHU
general]This function is used to correct roll maneuvers, knifeedge, etc. of stunt planes. [Airplane, general]

Motor

ButterÀy (Crow)
This function is used when powerful brake operationis necessary. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more]

Trim mix 1/2
The ailerons, elevators, and flaps trim offset rate
can be called by switch or condition selection. [Glider
general]Snap rollThis function selects the snap roll switch and adjusts
the steering angle of each rudder. Servo speed can also
be adjusted. [Airplane general]

The operation speed when the motor of F5B
and other EP gliders is started by switch can be set.
[Airplane/glider, general]

V-TailThis function adjusts the elevators and rudder of
9WDLOPRGHOV>$LUSODQHJOLGHU9WDLOVSHFL¿FDWLRQV@

WingletThis function adjusts the left and right rudders of
ZLQJOHWPRGHOV>$LUSODQHJOLGHUZLQJOHWVSHFL¿FDWLRQV@AIR BRAKERUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

AIL1
(Main Aileron)

AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

FLP 3(Brake Flap)

FLP 1(Camber Flap)

V-TAILELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)

AILVATORRUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)

ELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 131

Aileron diﬀerential[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. The differential rate canalso be adjusted according to the flying state by
VHWWLQJD¿QHWXQLQJ95
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)ŏ Select [Aileron differential] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Aileron left/rightadjustment*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

Fine tuning VR setting*The graph is operated by setting a VR, etc.

● Fine tuning VR operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Setting methodŏ Tap to the aileron (AIL) 1~4(2) left (or right)
setting item.
Adjust the aileron angles.
ŏ When setting the fine tuning VR, tap the "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the Àne tuning VR.
ŏ The Àne tuning rate can be set by curve.

132 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 Áaps or more]

Flap setting

The up/down travel of each flap (camber flaps:
FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted
independently at each servo according to the wing type.
ŏ The operation reference point of each Áap can beoffsetFLP 4(Brake Flap)

FLP 3(Brake Flap)
FLP 1(Camber Flap)

7KHFDPEHUÀDSVRIDÀDSPRGHOFDQEHPL[HGZLWKWKHEUDNHÀDSV %UDNH)/3WRFDPEHU)/3

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.

ŏ Select [Flap setting] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Up side/Down side
adjustment
Operation reference
point oﬀset
Camber ﬂap setting

Brake ﬂap setting

Operation is performed via the volume
switches, etc., set for each flap control of thefunction.

The operational volume
switch is set up by "Function"

Mixing
INH ⇔ ON

Up side/Down side
adjustment

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation reference
point oﬀset

Brake ﬂap to Camber ﬂap setting

Setting methodŏ Tap Áap (FLP) 1~4 up or down according to
the wing type.
Adjust the travel independently.
ŏ To offset the operation reference point ofeach Áap, tap the corresponding offset item.
Use the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ" button to offset
the reference point.
ŏ When using brake FLP to camber FLP mixing,*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the ModelType.

tap the [INH] item and tap the screen. (ON isdisplayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 133

model type]: Airplane/
AIL → Camber ﬂap [Corresponding
glider, 2 ailerons + 2 Áaps or more

This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stickis manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps
perform aileron operation simultaneously andthe operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
ŏ The aileron left/right mixing rate of each Áap servo
can be Àne-tuned.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.
ŏ Linking is possible: Link this mix to other mixes.

ŏ Select [AILńCamber flap] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

FLP 2(Camber Flap)
AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of eachﬂap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the the back of this manual.)ŏ Tap the left or right item of each Áap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
SRODULW\ RU ŏ A mixing curve can be set. (1/2 page)(For a description of the mixing curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)
ŏ To set linking, tap the [Link] item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

134 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

AIL → Brake ﬂap[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 4 Áaps or more

This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stickis manipulated, the aileron and brake flaps
perform the aileron operation simultaneously
and the operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
ŏ The aileron left and right mixing rates can be
adjusted for each Áap servo.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during Áight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.

ŏ Select [AILń Brake flap] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

FLP 3(Brake Flap)

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of eachﬂap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] itemƔSetting methodŏ Tap the INH item.
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the at the back of this manual.)ŏ Tap the left or right button of each Áap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by reversing the mixing rate
SRODULW\ RU ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)
ŏ To set linking, tap the Link item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 135

Aileron → Rudder[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during Áight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

(

AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

)

V-TAILRUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDERŏ Select [Aileronń Rudder] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rate

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the back of this manual.
ŏ When setting a VR, tap to the Fine Tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be selected.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting

method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)[Fine tuning VR operation mode][LIN.] M i x i n g r a t e 0  a t c e n t e r o f V R .
When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0 at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0 at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

136 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Elevator → Camber [Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function is used when you want to mix the
FDPEHUÀDSVZLWKHOHYDWRURSHUDWLRQ:KHQXVHGWKHÀDSVDUHORZHUHGE\XSHOHYDWRUDQGOLIWFDQ
be increased.

ŏ Select [ElevatorńCamber] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Note: Tailless wing elevator can be operated
when this mix is activated.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

Currently selected condition name

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

Ailerons and flaps rateadjustment

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rate

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be
selected.
ŏ A mixing curve can also be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 137

Camber mixing[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation which operates the wing camber(ailerons, camber flaps, brake flaps) in thenegative and positive directions. The aileron,flap, and elevator rates can also be adjusted
independently by curve, and attitude changes
caused by camber operation can be corrected.
*Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.

ŏ The up/down side rates of the aileron, flap, andelevator servos can be adjusted by curve. Whenthe mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing themixing rate polarity (+ or -).
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canbe set.
ŏ The speed of the aileron, Áap, and elevator servos
can be set. (In side/Out side)ŏ Select [Camber mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Currently selected condition name

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Servo speed setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Condition delay cut
switchCondition delay settingŏReturn to Model menu

Ailerons, flaps
and elevators rateadjustment● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

138 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When setting a condition delay, tap to the[Condition delay] item.
Set the delay.

(Curve/rate setup screen)ŏ The curve and rate are adjusted by callingthe aileron, flap, and elevator curve/ratescreens.
The rate and curve of each servo can be set
by calling each screen. (For a description of
the curve setting method, see the description
at the back of this manual.)
The servo speed can also be adjusted.

When setting a cut switch, tap [Cut-switch]and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the switch and set its
ON direction. (Always ON at [--] setting)(For a description of the condition delay
function, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

LS＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 139

Airbrake → ELE[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

AIR BRAKE

This mix is used when you want to mix theelevators with airbrake (spoiler) operation. It
raises the elevators to correct for dropping of thenose during airbrake operation.
*This function does not operate when airbrake is not assigned
at the Function menu in the Linkage menu.
ŏ The Rate 1 side/Rate 2 side mixing rate with theelevator servos can be adjusted.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

ŏ Select [Airbrakeń ELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

ELEVATOR 2*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.
ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.The VR operation
mode can also be set.
(For a description of the Àne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

140 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Camber ﬂap → ELE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 ailerons + 1 Áap or more

This mixing is used to correct changes (elevator
GLUHFWLRQ JHQHUDWHGZKHQWKHFDPEHUÀDSV VSHHG
ÀDSV DUHXVHGŏ The elevator servos up side/down side rate can be
adjusted. When the mixing direction is reversedby the linkage, adjustments can be made bychanging the mixing rate polarity (+ or ²).
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

ŏ Select [Camber flapńELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATOR

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR 2

ELEVATORELEVATOR 2Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ Tap elevator servos. Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or –).

ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the VR. The VR
operation mode can be selected.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 141

Rudder → Aileron[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder operation. It is used
when rudder is applied during roll maneuvers,
knife edge, etc. of stunt planes. It can be used tobank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize plane.
ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during Áight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.

(

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing)(

V-TAILRUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDERŏ Select [RudderńAileron] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.

)

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see back of this manual.)ŏ When setting a VR, tap to the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.

Fine tuning
setting

The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the Àne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the back of this manual.)ŏ When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON isdisplayed.)

142 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Rudder → Elevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

This function is used when you want to mix
elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used
to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder
is applied in roll maneuvers, knife edge, etc. ofacrobatic planes.

ŏ Link can be set: Links this mixing to other mixings.
ŏ The mixing rate can be Àne-tuned by setting a VR.
(Fine tuning)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ Select [RudderńElevator] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Fine tuning
setting

Setting methodŏ Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The

adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the Àne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON isdisplayed.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 143

Butterﬂy[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function allows powerful brake operation
by simultaneously raising the left and rightailerons and lowering the flaps (camber flap,
EUDNHÀDS This setting will allow the ailerons to be raised
while the flaps are simultaneously lowered.
Butterfly (crow) produces an extremely efficientlanding configuration by accomplishing thefollowing:
1. Slow the aircraft’s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.
3. Create more lift toward the center of thewing allowing it to Áy at a slower speed.

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ The butterfly operation reference point can beoffset. When the screen is tapped with the offset
item selected when operated to the position to
be changed, the reference point is offset. If thereference point is offset too much, unexpected
operation may be performed.
ŏ The ailerons and flaps operation speed can be
adjusted. (In side/Out side)ŏ A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canalso be set.
ŏ The differential rate can be adjusted.
*When servo binding occurs when setting the ailerons andÀDSVLQEXWWHUÀ\PL[LQJXVHWKH$)5IXQFWLRQWRDGMXVWWKH
rate.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

ŏ Select [Butterfly] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

To next page

In speed

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Out speed
Condition delay setting

Condition delay cut
switchThe diﬀerential rate
can be adjusted.

（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

When offsetting the butterfly operationreference point, operate to the throttle
stick point you want to change and thentouch the Offset button. The reference
point displays 0%. When [Yes] is touched,
the reference point is changed. Then,"Initialize elevator curve?" appears,
allowing you to conﬁrm your setting.

144 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

ŏReturn to Model menu
Select the Mixing RateAIL and FLP box. Adjust
the mixing rates.

Elevator rateadjustment(To elevator curve setup screen)(Elevator correction rate setup screen)

The offset position isindicated by a red dottedline by an elevator curve.

Overall adjustment
by Rate A and Rate B

Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 145

[Corresponding model type]: Glider, general

Trim mix 1/2

These functions call the ailerons, elevators, andÀDSV FDPEHUÀDSVEUDNHÀDSV WULPRIIVHWUDWHV
SUHVHWDFFRUGLQJWRWKHÀLJKWVWDWH
The amount of ailerons, elevator, and flaps
FDPEHUÀDSEUDNHÀDS WULPRIIVHWFDQEHVHWWR
a switch.
As an example Trim mix 1 can be set up for
ODXQFKLQJZLWKVSHHGÀDSVDQGDLOHURQVGURSSHG
and a slight amount of up elevator. Trim mix
2 can be used for high speed flying, with both
DLOHURQVDQGVSHHGÀDSVUHÀH[HGVOLJKWO\DQGDELW
of down elevator.
The trim functions can be activated duringÀLJKWE\VHWWLQJDVZLWFK7RSUHYHQWVXGGHQWULPFKDQJHVZKHQVZLWFKLQJÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDGHOD\
can be set to provide a smooth transition between
the two. Trim mix 2 will have priority over Trimmix 1.

Example1. Move to the [INH] item. Set the trim mix function to[ON].
*When separating the settings for each condition, move tothe [Group] item and set it to [Single].
2. Select the ON/OFF switch.
3. Select the [Manual] or [Auto] mode.
In the [Auto] mode, also select an auto SW. This
switch can be linked to a stick, etc.
<Speed>
In: The operation speed at switch ON can be set.
Out: The return speed at switch OFF can be set.
<Fine Tuning>
The offset rate can be varied in the Fine Tuning
numeric range set at screen by VR, etc. selection.
<Condition Delay>
When Áight conditions are set, the operation speed
can be set for each condition. Condition delay
operation can be interrupted and each rudder
Tuickly returned to its original position by selecting a
cut switch.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

ŏ Select [Trim mix1 or 2] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

To next page

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

In speed

Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Trim mix function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed

Condition delay
cut switch

Condition delay setting

When a ﬁne tuning VR is set,
the trim rates of ailerons,
flaps and elevators can be
adjusted.

（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）

ŏReturn to Model menu

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

The oﬀset rate of ailerons, ﬂaps and elevators can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding setting item. Adjust the rate.

146 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Snap roll

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general(Example) Setting example for F3A

This function selects the switch and rateadjustment of each rudder, (ailerons, elevators, orÀDSV ZKHQDVQDSUROOLVSHUIRUPHGŏ Four snap roll directions can be set. (Right/up,
right/down, left/up, left/down)ŏ Operation mode: When [Master] mode is selected,
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by masterswitch in the state in which the direction switch
was switched to the direction in which you wantto snap roll. When [Single] mode is selected, snap
roll in each direction can be executed by meansof independent switches.
ŏ A safety switch can be set. As a safety measure,the switch can be set so that snap roll is not
executed when, for instance, the landing
gear is lowered, even if the switch is turned on
accidentally. The snap roll switch is activated only
when the safety switch is ON.
ŏ The operation speed of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted for each snap rolldirection. (In side/out side)ŏ Mode: [Master]ŏ Safety SW: [SW-G] (Safety measure)ŏ Master SW: [SW-H] (Main switch for
executing snap roll)ŏ Direction switches:*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left andright direction switches are selected here.
Right/Up: [SW-D] OFF-OFF-ON
Right/Down: [SW-D] ON-OFF-OFF
Left/Up: [SW-A] OFF-OFF-ON
Left/Down: [SW-A] ON-OFF-OFFŏ Speed adjustment
The operation speed of each control
surface when the snap switch is ON canbe changed and snap roll executed bystick while there is switch operation can be
performed.

ŏ Select [Snap roll] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown
The ON/OFF switch
below.
of snap roll is chosen.

The safety switch is
chosen.
To next pageŏReturn to Model menu
Master or Single ischosenCondition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Snap rolldirections

Master mode : Direction
switches
Single mode : Snap rollswitches

Aileron, elevator and
Rudder rate adjustment

In speed

Out speed（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 147

Air brake
This function is used when an air brake isnecessary when landing or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap,
brake flap) offset amount can be activated by aswitch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
VSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQ
be adjusted. (In side/Out side) A delay can be set
for each condition, and a Cut switch which willturn OFF the delay can be chosen. Trim amounts
FDQEHILQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95<RXFDQDOVR
set the Auto Mode, which will link Airbrake to a
stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch ordial can also be set as the ON/OFF switch.

ŏ Select [Air brake] at the model menu and call the
setup screen shown below.

Elevator
Aileron 2
Aileron 1*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
To next page

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

In speed

The ON/OFF switch of
air brake is chosen.
Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Air brake function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed
Condition delay
setting and cut switch
setting.

Fine tuning settingŏReturn to Model menu

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

148 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）

Offset：The offset
rate of ailerons, flaps,and elevators can be
a d j u s t e d . Ta p t o t h ecorresponding setting
item. Adjust the rate.
Fine tuning：When a ﬁnetuning VR is set on thenext page, the ailerons',
ﬂaps', and elevators' trim
rates can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding
setting item. Adjust therate.

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider/multicopter, general

GyroThis function is used when a GYA Series gyrois used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/GYmode) can be switched with a switch.
ŏ Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can beswitched.
ŏ Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3) can be
simultaneously controlled.

*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use theFunction menu of the Linkage menu to assign the sensitivity
channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) used to a vacant channel
beforehand.
6HW>&RQWURO@DQG>7ULP@RWKHUWKDQ)XQFWLRQWR>@ŏ Select [Gyro] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the threerates (sensitivity) and switching between Normaland AVCS is possible.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment

ŏ Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be used.
Tap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
ŏ When using this function, Tap [INH].
ŏ When a Futaba GYA gyro is used, when [GY] type is selected, thesensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
ŏ When setting a switch, tap the Switch item and tap the "--" button to callthe selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 149

(Example) Setting three axis using a G<A44 and G<A441 (2)ŏ Wing type: Aileron 2 servos mounted fuselage selectedŏ Set 5CH → Gyro (GYA441AIL), 7CH → Gyro2 (GYA441ELE), 8CH → Gyro3 (GYA440RUD), Control and Trim → "--" : at
the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
ŏ Gyro setting of the Model menu.

Rate
1
2
3

ACT
OFF/ON
INH
ON/OFF

Type
GY

SwitchSE

Gyro
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ２
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ３
AVCS : 60%

GY

SENormal : 60%

Normal : 60%

Normal : 60%*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E
and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since switch E is R7008SB
turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].

GYA441

Aileron servo

AVCS
GAIN 0％S.BUS2 port

GYA441NORMAL

Elevator servo

When AVCS is used werecommend that thesensitivity CH be set tothe 3-position.
GYA440150 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Rudder servo

Ailevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type
(Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)
Ailevator

This function improves the operating
performance of the roll axis by operating theelevators as ailerons.
Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard
FRQYHQWLRQDO RUYWDLOPRYHVLQGHSHQGHQWO\OLNH
ailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side
moving up and down together, each side moves in
opposite directions when moving as an ailevator.
2Q D9WDLO WKLV LV DOVR NQRZQ DV D UXGGHUYDWRU
as they can serve the same purpose. Typically,both ailevator and ailerons are coupled together tomaximize roll performance, especially on larger
wingspan planes.

ELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)

Note: Select ailevator as the Model type at theModel type screen. This changes the output
channel. Check the Function menu.

ŏ Select [Ailevator] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
The up and down rates of the left andright elevators when the elevator stick ismanipulated can be individually adjusted.

(Aileron function)
When the elevators are used asailerons, aileron travel of the left andright elevators can be adjusted.

ŏ Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
SRODULW\ RU ,IDODUJHYDOXHRIWUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUH
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run outof travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 151

Acceleration[Corresponding model type]: Glider, general

Acceleration setting can be performed at Elevator,(OHYDWRU ĺ &DPEHU DQG$LOHURQ ĺ 5XGGHU *OLGHU
only)
ŏ This setting is divided into elevator setting and camber
setting. The setting method is the same.
ŏ Camber setting sets the acceleration function for Ele
to camber mixing. Setting is not performed when Ele tocamber mixing is INH.
ŏ The acceleration function can be set for both the upside and down side.
ŏ Function ON/OFF switch setting is performed for
Aileronń Rudder setting only.
ŏ Aileronń Rudder setting is acceleration
function setting for Aileronń Rudder mixing. It is not
performed when Aileronń Rudder mixing is INH.

ŏ Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
2/3 : Elevator → Camber
3/3 : Aileron → Rudder
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Act position
The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
（First return）1 〜 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）

Setting method
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
ŏ The operation point at accelerationand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.

Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the servo stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

152 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

Motor

This function lets you set the operation speed
when the motor of an F5B or other EP glider isstarted by switch. The operation speed can be set
in 2 ranges of slow speed flight and high speedÀLJKW 6SHHG6SHHG 7KLVIXQFWLRQFDQDOVREH
operated as a safety function by setting 2 switches.
ŏ The in side and out side operating speeds can be
adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed 1/
Speed 2).
ŏ The boundary between the 2 ranges can be set.
(From speed 1 to speed 2)

ŏ Select [Motor] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

ŏ The set operation speed operation can be
activated at initial operation only. (1 time
operation) However, operation can be repeatedby setting the switch to OFF before operation isÀnished. When you want to reset 1 time operation,
set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and then reset it to[ON].
ŏ The motor (CH3) is controlled by SW-G. (Initial
setting) When changing the switch or stick which
controls the motor, first change Function of the
Linkage menu.
Note: When using this function, always check initial
operation with the propeller removed.

ŏReturn to Model menuŏ When using this function, Tap [INH].
ŏ Group/single mode switching(For more information, see the description
at the back of this manual.)ŏ Switch
A switch that turns the function itself
ON/OFF can be selected.
ŏ Motor off position
Tap the motor off button when [SW-G] is in
the motor OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.
The screen graph display OFF direction alsochanges.

ŏ When using this function, Tap [INH].
ŏ When you want to set the "One time mode",tap to the [One time] item and tap thescreen.
ŏ Speed 1 to 2
The speed 1 and speed 2 region boundary
can be changed,
ŏ Operation speed adjustment
The speed when speed 1 and speed 2 are
ON (In) and OFF (Out) can be adjusted.

Notes
ŏ First decide the motor OFF direction, and then
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
ŏ We recommend that motor OFF be set incombination with F/S.
ŏ Set the basic operation direction with the reverse
function to match the ESC used.
ŏ Always set the motor OFF position.

＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 153

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type V-tailV-TailThis function lets you adjust for left and right rudder
angle changes at elevator and rudder operation of a
9WDLODLUSODQH
9WDLOLVZKHQVHUYRVDUHXVHGWRJHWKHUWRFRQWURO
rudder movement as elevators. In addition to eachrudder side moving up and down together, each side
moves in opposite directions when moving as elevators.
2QD9WDLOWKLVLVDOVRNQRZQDVDUXGGHUYDWRUDVWKH\
can serve the same purpose.

ELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

RUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)

ŏ Select [V-Tail] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 elevator operation(Rudder function)
Left and right travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 rudder operation

ŏ Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
SRODULW\ RU ,IDODUJHYDOXHRIWUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUH
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run outof travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

154 ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞

Winglet[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, winglet(2RUD)

This function adjusts the left and right rudder
angles of airplanes with winglets.
Winglets are used to improve the efficiency of
DLUFUDIW ORZHULQJ WKH OLIWLQGXFHG GUDJ FDXVHG E\wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled
extension at the tips of each wing.
Winglets work by increasing the effective aspectratio wing without adding greatly to the structuralstress and hence necessary weight of its structure
 DQ H[WHQVLRQ RI ZLQJ VSDQ ZRXOG DOVR SHUPLWlowering of induced drag, though it would causeparasitic drag and would require boosting theVWUHQJWKRIWKHZLQJDQGKHQFHLWVZHLJKWWKHUH
would come a point at which no overall usefulsaving would be made. A winglet helps to solve thisby effectively increasing the aspect ratio without
adding to the span of the wing.

RUDDER 1
Winglet(at Flying
wing )RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing()

ŏ Select [Winglet] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Rudder 1/2)
The travel at rudder stick left and right
operation can be individually set.

ŏ Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
SRODULW\ RU ＜ Model menu (Airplane/Glider/Multicopter Functions) ＞ 155

MODEL MENU (Helicopter functions)This section contains information on thecommands that apply to helicopters only. For
instructions on airplane, glider and multicopter,
refer to the sections pertaining to those aircraft.
Use the Model type function in the Linkagemenu to select the swash type matched to thefuselage beforehand.
◆ Condition hold
When performing adjustments, such as idling up, whenthe engine is engaged, keep the throttle stable so as to preventthe engine from revving too high. Once your adjustments arecomplete, always make sure to set the function to [OFF].
WARNING

Also, add flight conditions at the Condition
Select screen if necessary before setting the model
data at each function. (Up to 8 conditions can beused)
The AFR function, dual rate function and otherfunctions common to all model types, are describedin a separate section.
*Condition hold ON/OFF operation is possible under normal
conditions and the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd into the slow
throttle range. Throttle servos will remain at the throttle stick
position during ON operation.

● ON/OFF operation on the Home screen

Under the conditions described above, tap the Condition holdFor safety reasons, when performing individual [OFF] displayed on the screen.
adjustments it is recommended that you shut off
During function operation, Condition hold will display [ON]the engine and disconnect the motor to prevent
and an alarm will sound.
rotation.
*Sudden, abrupt rotation can result in death or serious injury.

Tap this icon to
go to the modelmenu.

ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

(Model menu screen example)*The Model menu screen
depends on the model type.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ

Pitch curve: Pitch curve and hovering trim adjustment
Throttle curve: Throttle curve and hovering trim adjustment
Acceleration: Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden throttle and pitch commands
Throttle hold: Moves the throttle to idle during autorotation
Swash mixing: Compensates for each control response
Throttle mixing: Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied
PitchĺNeedle:$GMXVWVUHVSRQVHFXUYHLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
PitchĺRudder: Handles torque changes from pitch angle inputs
Gyro: Used to switch gyro sensitivity
Governor: Used to switch RPM of the helicopter’s head

156 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

Pitch curve / Pitch trimųƌƗƆƋŃƆƘƕƙƈ

This function adjusts the pitch operation curve
IRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQIRUWKHRSWLPDOÀLJKWVWDWH
relative to movement of the throttle stick.

ŏ Select [Pitch curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

*Up to 17 points can be set for the point curve types.
+RZHYHUZKHQXVLQJWKHSRLQWVRUSRLQWVVSHFL¿HGWR
create a curve, a simple curve can be created by reducing
the number of input points to 3 or 5, and then entering the
VSHFL¿HGYDOXHDWWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJSRLQWVWKDW\RXFUHDWHG
a curve.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are suﬃcient.

*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normal curve adjustment
ŏ For normal curve, usually use [Point] typeand create a basic pitch curve centeredabout hovering. Use this function together
with the THR curve (normal) function andadjust the curve so that up/down control isbest at a constant engine speed.

Idle up curve adjustment
ŏ For the high side pitch curve, set the
maximum pitch which does overload theengine. For the low side pitch curve, create
curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, andother purposes and use the idle up curves
according to the performance.

Throttle hold curve adjustment
ŏ The throttle hold curve is used when
executing auto rotation dives.

Operation precautions

WARNING
When actually starting the engine andﬂying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling state.
＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 157

Setting method
ŏ Group/Single item: When you also want to
input the same setting contents at otherconditions, perform setting in the groupmode. In this case, the same contents are
input to the other conditions set in the groupmode. When you want to set each condition
independently, select the single mode
(initial setting). Other conditions can be set
independently.

Curve setting examples
The screens shown below are curves createdby entering the pitch rate at low, center, and highside (3 points or 5 points) at each condition. WhenDFWXDOO\FUHDWLQJDFXUYHLQSXWWKHUDWHVSHFL¿HGDW
the fuselage (or the reference value).

*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ3LWFK Curve ([ample
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curve

Idle-up 2 Curve

Pitch servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

158 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

Hold CurveųƌƗƆƋŃƗƕƌƐŃŋūƒƙƈƕƌƑƊŃƓƌƗƆƋŏŃƋƌƊƋŃƓƌƗƆƋŏŃƏƒƚŃƓƌƗƆƋŌ
The hovering pitch, low pitch, and high pitch trim setup screen can be called from the Pitch curve setup
screen.
ŏReturn to Model menu

Hovering pitch trim
setting

Low/high pitch trim
setting

Hovering pitch trim

High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim

The Hovering Pitch trim function trims the pitch
near the hovering point. Normally, it is used withthe hovering condition. The hovering pitch can be¿QHWXQHGIRUFKDQJHVLQURWRUVSHHGDFFRPSDQ\LQJ
FKDQJHVLQWHPSHUDWXUHKXPLGLW\DQGRWKHUÀLJKW
conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so thatrotor speed is constant. This function can be used
together with the hovering Throttle Trim function
for more delicate operation.

High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim is the pitch servo
high side and low side trim function.

Setting methodŏ When using only the hovering (normal)
condition, switch the group mode to thesingle mode (initial setting) before setting.
ŏ Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: LD
ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.

Setting methodŏ When setting the adjustment knobs common
to all the conditions, set them in the groupmode.
ŏ Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)ŏ Select the adjustment knobs.
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (lowside)
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.
ŏ Trim acts as high side or low side trim with thecenter as the standard.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 159

Throttle curve / Throttle Hover trimŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃŃƆƘƕƙƈ
This function adjusts the throttle operation curvefor each condition for optimum engine speed tothrottle stick movement.
Up to 17 curve points can be set for the point
curve type. However, when the 5 points and otherŏ Select [Throttle curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

point data is used, a simple curve can be easily
created by reducing the number of input points ofthe curve to 5 and entering the specified value atthe corresponding points.

Currently selected condition nameŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the back of thismanual.

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are suﬃcient.

Throttle hover trim
operating position(White line)

Normal curve adjustment
ŏ Normal curve creates a basic curve
centered around hovering. Use it alongwith the normal pitch curve and adjust sothat up/down control at a constant engine
speed is easiest.

Idle up curve adjustment
ŏ Set an idle up curve that maintains a
constant speed at all times, even during
operation which reduces the pitch
performed in Áight. Create a curve matched
to loop, roll, 3D, or other purposes and theidle up curve according to the performance.

Operation precautions

WARNING
When actually starting the engine andﬂying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling mode.

Setting method
ŏ Group/single item: When you want tosimultaneously enter the same settings toother functions, make the settings in thegroup mode. In this case, the same setting

160 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

contents are entered to the all conditions.
When you want to set each condition
independently, make the settings after
selecting the single mode (Initial setting).

Curve setting examples
The curves shown below are created by using
the point curve type and inputting the data of the
5 points 0% (low side), 25%, 50% (center), 75%,
100% (high) side at each condition. They areƔ7KroWWle Curve ([ample
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curvecreated by reducing the number of points on theline to 5. When actually creating a curve, enter
WKHGDWDVSHFL¿HGSHUWKHDLUFUDIW RUWKHUHIHUHQFH
value).
*For a description of the curve creation method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
Idle-up 2 Curve

Throttle servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)ŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃūƒƙƈƕŃƗƕƌƐ
The Throttle Hover trim setup screen can be called from the Throttle curve setup screen.
ŏReturn to Model menu

The Throttle Hover function trims the throttle
near the hovering point. Normally, use it withhovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed
accompanying changes in the temperature,humidity, and other flight conditions can betrimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation ismost stable. More delicate trimming is also possible
by using this function along with the Hover Pitch
function.
Setting methodŏ When using the hovering (normal) condition
only, switch the group mode to the single
mode (initial setting) and make the settings.
ŏ Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: RD
ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When the value is made small, trim acts only
near the center.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be set.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 161

Acceleration
This function is used to adjust the pitch andthe throttle rise characteristic at acceleration/
deceleration operation. An acceleration function
which temporarily increases the pitch and throttle
operations at throttle stick acceleration/deceleration
operation can be set.
Example of acceleration function useŏWhen used at pitch, the acceleration
function is effective when you want to
Tuicken the response of the fuselage at 3DÁight Áip, etc.
When used, high pitch temporarily exceeds
maximum pitch, but immediately returns tomaximum pitch.

ŏ Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
1/2 : Pitch
2/2 : Throttle
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Act position
The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
（First return）1 〜 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）

Setting method
ŏ Acceleration can be set at both setting
at acceleration (high) and setting at
deceleration (low).
(The operation point is displayed on agraph.)
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.

162 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

ŏ The operation point at accelerationand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the pitch stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

Throttle hold

Example of use

This function sets the throttle cut position for
autorotation. The throttle position can also be set toan idling position. Setting of these 2 positions canbe selected by switch. This allows use for switching
during training.

ŏ Select [Throttle hold] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

ŏ Since throttle hold has 2 modes (Cut) and(Idle), using it in the Idling mode during
training and in the Cut mode when
stopping the engine at contest, etc. isconvenient.
Note: When throttle hold is set to ON in the normal
condition, throttle hold acts and the throttle servo
is deactivated. Always set throttle hold to ON in thehold condition.

ŏReturn to Model menu
Current position
Set to the engine
stop position.

Set to the idling
position.

Hold position

Engine cut setting

Setting method
ŏ Operation mode selection
Manual mode(Manual): The throttle holdfunction is operated by switch operation
only.
Auto mode(Auto): The throttle hold function
operation is linked to the throttle stick
position.
Auto position setting: When the auto mode isselected, the throttle position (auto position)
can be selected. Move the throttle stick to
the position you want to set and tap thescreen. (Auto position is displayed.)ŏ Hold position adjustment
Throttle Hold (Cut) sets the throttle cut
position. Adjust it so that the carburetor is fully
closed.
Throttle Hold (Idle): Make this adjustment tomaintain idling for training. Adjustments canbe made based on the throttle curve idle
position.
ŏ The throttle servo operating speed can be
adjusted. (Speed)ŏ Throttle cut or training function can beswitched by hold function selector switch.

Engine idle setting

Operation precautions

WARNING
When starting the engine, conﬁrm thatthe idle up condition and throttle holdcondition are OFF.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 163

Swash mixing
The swash mix function is used to correct theswash plate in the aileron (roll) direction andelevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each
operation of each condition.
Adjustment by independent curve for aileron,elevator, and pitch operations is possible. The
operation can be smoothly adjusted by calling up
the “Curve setup” screen by tapping the mixing
item that corresponds to the mixing and direction
which needs correction.

Example of use
ŏ As an example, use swash mixing to correctundesirable tendencies in the roll direction.
ŏ For a condition which uses Aileron to
Elevator, set this function to ON. Whenraising the nose at a right roll, when theRate B side is input and the right aileron is
operated, the elevator moves to the downside. Tune by adjusting the Rate. For rightroll, adjust to the rate A side.

ŏ Select [Swash mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)ŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ The correction rate can be set by curve.
ŏ A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

164 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

Throttle mixing
This function corrects slowing of engine speed
caused by swash plate operation during aileronor elevator operation. The method of applying
clockwise or counterclockwise torque when
pirouetting can also be corrected.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the throttle side correction rate relative torapid stick operation can also be set.
ŏ Select [Throttle mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ The correction rate can be set by curve.
ŏ A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

When correction is necessary, tap to the mixing
item corresponding to the mixing that needs
correction and tap the screen to call the curve setup
screen, and then correct the slowing.
Setting example
ŏ Aileron to Throttle applies a load to theengine and corrects slowing of theengine speed when the aileron stick was
operated. Engine racing can be adjusted
independently at the right aileron and left
aileron by Rates A and B.
"CTRM" : The correction
rate maximum when
the throttle stick iscentered.
"Linear" : Correction
applied for the entire
throttle range.

<Acceleration function setting>ŏ Acceleration can be set for both settings(Left) and (Right)
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time (Damping) after operation
can be set.
ŏ The operation point (Act position) when thecorrection rate is increased and decreased
can be set independently. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration
operation is performed.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 165

Pitch → Needle
This mixing is used when the engine is equippedwith needle control or other fuel-air mixture
adjustment. A needle curve can be set.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases needle operation at throttle stick

acceleration/deceleration operation can be set.
The rise characteristic of the needle servo atacceleration and deceleration operation can be
adjusted.

ŏ Select [PitchńNeedle] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normally, use [Point] type.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ A needle curve can be set.
ŏ A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap
to the [--] item. Tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

166 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞< Acceleration function setting>ŏAcceleration can be set at both
acceleration (high) and deceleration (low).
ŏThe acceleration rate (rate) and the return
time after operation (damping) can be set.
ŏAn operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set.
When an operation point was exceeded,
acceleration operation is performed.

Pitch → Rudder (Revolution mixing)
Use this mix when you want to suppress thereaction torque generated by main rotor pitch andspeed changes during pitch operation. Adjust sothat the nose does not move in the rudder direction.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the correction rate at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set. The
mixing rate at acceleration/deceleration can be set.

However, when a GY Series or other heading
hold gyro is used, since correction is performedby the gyro, this mix is not used. If this function
is used when the gyro operation mode is the
AVCS mode, the neutral position will change.

ŏSelect [PitchńRudder]at the model menu
and call the setup
screen shown.
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normally, use [Point] type.

Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ A mixing curve is set.

<Normal condition mixing curve><Idle up condition mixing curve>

The mixing curve rate starts from a smallvalue.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction (polarity), when pitch was
operated at the plus side, set so thatmixing is in the clockwise direction. First,
trim at hovering and then adjust theneutral position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
from hovering at a constant rate matched
to your own rhythm, and adjust the pitch
so the nose does not deflect when thethrottle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving fromhovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that thenose does not deflect when the throttle israised and lowered.

Set the mixing rate so that the rudder
direction at high-speed flight is straightahead. Adjust for each condition used.

<Acceleration function setting>ŏ Acceleration operation can be performed
for both setting at acceleration (High)and setting at deceleration (Low).
ŏ Acceleration rate setting (Rate)ŏ The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
ŏ An operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set
independently. When an operation point
was exceeded, acceleration operation is
performed.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 167

Gyro[Helicopter]

This function is used to adjust gyro sensitivity.
The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be set for each condition.
The gyro sensitivity can be switched with eachcondition or the switch. (3 sensitivities)*Compatible with 3 axis gyro (CGY750).
ŏ Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

Gyro（RUD)
setting

Note: [Gyro] [Gyro2] [Gyro3] Default function[Gyro]: CH6(FASSTest12CH) CH5(Other system type)[Gyro2] : CH9[Gyro3] : CH10
Always set to [--] both (control) and (trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.

Gyro2（AIL)
settingGyro3（ELE)
setting
Tapping these willpull up the detailed
selection screen foreach.

ŏReturn to Model menu

Rate1 Gyro type andgain
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

Rate2 Gyro type andgain
Rate3 Gyro type andgain

When using Rate2/Rate3, make it
INH → ON or OFF.
Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)
Use this when you wantto adjust sensitivity via
VR, etc., and not onscreen data entry. Tap "-", select "VR", etc., andthen tap the value toadjust. (Won't operate
when value is "0".)Setting methodŏ When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)ŏ When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ Three rates can be switched for eachcondition. (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3)ŏ A Àne tuning VR can be set.

168 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

The ON/OFF switchof gyro is chosen.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment

Usage example #1: Using gyro for only the rudder and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro : CH5
For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch. The gyro sensitivity adjustment connector connects to 6ch.

ŏ Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will let you
select either Normal orAVCS.

B e c a u s e t h esensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.

Set gain of a rudder

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

Usage example #2: Using 3-axis gyro CGY750 and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro RUD : CH5 For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch.
Gyro2 AIL : CH9
Gyro3 ELE : CH10
For the CGY750, simply connect the S.BUS; functions do not need to be set.
(For the FASSTest12CH, change Gyron/RUD to 6ch.)

ŏ Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will
let you select either
N o r m a l o r AV C S f o reach of the three axes.

Set gain of a rudder

Set gain of an aileronSet gain of an elevator

B e c a u s e t h esensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 169

Governor*The governor is used by connecting the governor speed
setting channel to CH7 (initial setting).

*When using the Fuel Mixture function, the mixture servo
is controlled from the governor. When transmitting the
mixture curve data from the transmitter to the governor, thegovernor AUX (m.trm) connector must be connected to CH8(initial setting) and governor side setting performed. See thegovernor instruction manual.

*When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch,connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor toCH8 (initial setting) and set the switch to CH8 (Governor2)
at the Function menu of the Linkage menu.

Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--] for[Governor] and [Governor 2] of the Function menuof the Linkage menu.

When using a Futaba governor, this function isused to switch the RPM of the helicopter's head.
Up to 3 rates can be set for each condition.

ŏ Select [Governor] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.
ŏReturn to Model menu

RPM adjustment
Fine tuning VR settings

Unit display selection:[%] [rpm]

Setting methodƔActivate the mixing
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup
screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo
travel and limit point are now initialized.
*When changed from INH to ACT (ON), the servo travel isinitialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.
*When operation is changed to INH at all conditions, theservo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point isinitialized to 135.

170 ＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞

ƔRPM adjustment
Tap to the rate item .
Adjust the rpm using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons.
Initial value: 50 (1500rpm)
Adjustment range: OFF, 0~110 (OFF,
700~3500rpm)*When the value is tapped reset to the initial value.

ƔUnit display selection
Tap to the UNIT item [] [rpm]. Select theunit.

ƔDiplay mode selectionƔFine tuning VR settings*When [rpm] mode is selected above setting, the display
mode can be selected.
* There is no change in the transmitter output even when the"Mode" is changed. Calibration should be performed via thegovernor.
* In order to use the Governor function of the T18SZ, it isnecessary to change the settings on the governor for the low
side 700 rpm mode.

When the Mode of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.

Tap to the [--] item and tap the screen toaccess the selection screen. Select thecontrol.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Tap to the rate item .
Adjust the trim rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ""ʆʆ" buttons.
Initial value: 0 (0rpm)
Adjustment range: -20~+20
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the sensitivity is
reset to the initial value.

Tap the screen to return to the cursor mode.

main rotor R.P.M.

The chart below indicates themode percentage and thecorresponding RPM.
3900rpm
3500rpm
2700rpm
2500rpm
2100rpm2000rpm
1500rpm

1000rpm

700rpm0%50% : neutral 100% 110%main rotor R.P.M. setting channel travel＜ Model Menu (Helicopter Functions) ＞ 171

Common operations used in function setup screen
This section describes the functions often used at the function setup screen. Refer to it when setting
each function.

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƙƄƏƘƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
Tapping the value setting buttons on each screen will cause value input
buttons to appear at the top of the panel.
Value input buttons display
at the top of the panel
Pressing and holding
a value will return it
to its default setting.
Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in valueŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƳƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑƖ
Group/single mode switching (Gr/Singl)

Condition delay setting

When setting multiple flight conditions,linking the setting contents with all conditions(group mode) or setting independently (singlemode) can be selected. The mode can bechanged at the [Gr] item on each setup screen.

Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo
position and variations in the operating time
between channels can be suppressed by using
the condition delay function of the condition
select function [Condition select].
When the delay function is set at theswitching destination condition, a delay
corresponding to that amount is applied and therelated functions change smoothly.

[Group/single mode switching][Setting method]

Tap

Tap

Tap
ŏGroup mode (Gr)The same setting contents are set to allthe Áight conditions.
ŏSingle mode (Singl)
Set this mode when the setting contents
are not linked with other conditions.

172 ＜ Data ＞

1. Switch to the condition you want to set
and tap the delay[ 0 (value)].
2. Set the delay using the " ▼▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ ""ʆʆ" buttons
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)(When the value is tapped, the delay is reset to the initialvalue.)

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƲƑƈŃƗƘƑƌƑƊŃŹŵ
Operation mode selection*The operation modes which can beselected depend on the function.

VR selection

Rate adjustment[Setting method]
1. Control selection
Tap the [Control] "--" button to call the<Hardware select> screen, and then selectthe switch and its ON direction.
2. Mode selection
Tap the [Mode] button, and then select themode ([LIN.], [ATL+], [ATL-], or [SYM.]).
3. Rate adjustment
Tap the [Rate] "value" button.
Set the rate using the " ▼ ▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ ""ʆʆ" buttons(Fine tuning VR operation position)[Fine tuning VR operation mode][LIN.] M i x i n g r a t e 0  a t c e n t e r o f V R .
When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0 at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0 at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

Initial value: 0Adjustment range: -100~+100
(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)

LIN.

ATL+ ATL-

SYM.

After setting, press a HOME/EXIT button＜ Data ＞ 173ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƖƈƕƙƒŃƖƓƈƈƇ

Linear（First）
0 〜 27（Slowly）

In case of Linear

Servo speed setting
The servo speed at each function
operation (including flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The servos
operate smoothly at a fixed speed
corresponding to the set speed. The
operating speed (In side) and return speed(Out side) can be set individually.

In
Speed

In speed

Out
Speed

Out speed

Symmetry

Switch the operation mode according
to the set function.
"Symmetry" mode: Used with ailerons
and other self neutral functions.
"Linear" mode: Used with functions
which hold the operation position of
the throttle and switch channel, etc.
[Setting method]
1. Select the mode ([Linear] or[Symmetry]). Each time the button istapped, it toggles between [Linear]and [Symmetry].
2. Tap the In or Out Speed button andset the servo speed.

In
Speed

In
Speed

Out
Speed

Out
Speed
In case of Symmetry
In speed

Initial value: 0
Setting range: 0~27

174 ＜ Data ＞

Out speedŦƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƒƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑ
This section describes the setting procedure of curves which are used with the AFR function and eachmixing function.
Curve type selection
Four types of curves (EXP1, EXP2, Point andSpline) can be selected.

Curve type selection
1. Tap the button of the curve type youwant to use.
*The curve type changes and the display
returns to the original screen.
[EXP1]: EXP1 curve[EXP2]: EXP2 curve[Point]: point curve[Spline]: spline curve＜ Data ＞ 175

Setting by curve type
When the curve type is selected as described above, adjustment items corresponding to the curve typeappear on the screen. Adjust each curve as described below.
EXP1/EXP2 curve adjustment(EXP1 curve)

vertical direction]
1. Tap to the [Offset] setting item.
2. Move the curve in the vertical direction
using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ" buttons
Initial value: +0.0
(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)

U s i n g t h e E X P 1 c u r v e i s e ff e c t i v e i nsmoothing starting of the ailerons, elevator,
rudder, etc.
(EXP2 curve)*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

Using the EXP2 curve is effective in engine
rise and other engine control.
The curve left and right rates ([Rate A], [RateB]) and EXP curve rate ([EXP A], [EXP B]) canbe adjusted individually. ([EXP] for EXP2)
The curve can also be offset horizontally([Offset]) in the vertical direction.
[Rate setting]
1. Tap to the [Rate A], [Rate B], [EXP A], or [EXP
B] setting item.
2. Set the rate using the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ"buttons
Initial value: +100.0 (rate)/+0.0 (EXP rate)*Initial value differs depending on function.

Adjustment range: -200.0~+200.0 (rate)/100.0~+100.0 (EXP rate)(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)[Offsetting the curve horizontally in the

176 ＜ Data ＞

Point curves or spline curves of up to 11/17 points
can be used. (Initial value: 7/9 points) The set
points can be freely increased, decreased, andoffset.
Point addition method
1.Open the screen of a mixing curve with thecurve function.

5. Press "Rate" and use the up/down arrows toadjust the rate points up or down.

The kind of mixing curve

Point deletion method
1. Use the move between points button [ł ]or [ń ]and select the point. (The red point ʄ is theselected point.)

The red point（■）
moves (to green point)

2.Tap the "Position" button.
Move between
point
A red mark（ □ ）moves freely

2. Tap the [Remove] button. (The selected
point becomes an outlined point Ō )3. Use the move between points button [ł ]or [ń ]. *The point is deleted.
3. Tap the "ʈʈ" "ʈ" "ʆ" "ʆʆ" button andselect the position (mark Ō) you want to
add.
4. When the "Add" is tapped, the point is
added.（Ō）ń（ʄ）*A new point is created.

＜ Data ＞ 177

Curve setting operation Spline curve
A smoother curve is made.
Setting method is same at spline and point.
Point

SplineUp to 11 or 17 points curve can be used.
(differs with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17 points
curve), 7 points (11 points curve)*The set points can be freely increased, decreased, andoffset.

[Rate adjustment of each point]

Spline curve

1. Tap to theitemand select the point whose
rate you want to set.
*The mark on the curve shows
the currently selected point.

2. T a p t o t h e [ R a t e ]item. And set the rateusing the "ʈʈ" "ʈ""ʆ" "ʆʆ" buttons
The kind of mixing curve

Point curve (Point) adjustment(Point)Up to 11 or 17 points curve can beused. (differs with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17points curve), 7 points (11 points
curve)

178 ＜ Data ＞

Repeat steps 1 through 2 and adjust the
curve.

*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

Point curve (Point) adjustment(Point)Up to 11 or 17 points curve can be used.
(differs with function)*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

Initial point number: 9 points (17 points
curve), 7 points (11 points curve)*The set points can be freely increased, decreased, andoffset.

[Rate adjustment of each point]

1. Tap to theitemand select the point whose
rate you want to set.
*The mark on the curve shows
the currently selected point.

2. T a p t o t h e [ R a t e ]item. And set the rateusing the "ʈʈ" "ʈ""ʆ" "ʆʆ" buttons

Repeat steps 1 through 2 and adjust the
curve.

＜ Data ＞ 179

ŶƚƌƗƆƋŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
The various functions used in the T18SZ can be selected by switch. The switch (including when stick,trim lever, or VR are used as a switch) setting method is common to all functions.
Switch selection
When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called.

(Switch selection screen example)

Tap the chosen
switch.

When switch is selected

When stick, trim lever, or VR is selected.

Switch ON/OFF setting is possible at eachposition.

When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as aswitch, the following 4 modes can be selected.

1. When the ON/OFF "Set" position switch istapped after the switch was selected, thescreen shown below appears.

Next page

Normal or Alternate: Alternate switchingmode is available depending on mixing
function.
*When the button of each position is tapped,
it toggles between ON and OFF.
2. Tap the button and set to the ON position.
3. Close the screen by tapping [Hardware
select].

180 ＜ Data ＞

Hysteresis-type and box-type can be selected in a hardware select screen.
When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as a switch, the following 4 modes can be selected.

◆ Linear・Hysteresis mode

◆ Symmetry・Hysteresis modeThis setting method selects function ON/OFF basedon the set point. Hysteresis (dead band) can be set
to ON and OFF. The ON and OFF positions can bereversed with the Reverse button.

The operation is the same as the linear hysteresis
mode, but left and right (up and down) operations are
symmetrical about the neutral position. For example,
when you want to switch DR1 with the aileron stick,when the stick is moved to the left or right, DR1 canbe turned ON at the same left and right position.

◆ Linear・Box mode

◆ Symmetry・Box modeThis mode turns on the switch within a range of 2 points.
Each point can be set. The ON and OFF positions can bereversed with the Reverse switch.

The operation is the same as the linear box mode,
but left and right (up and down) operation issymmetrical about the neutral position.

＜ Data ＞ 181

When shifting the ON/OFF point
The ON/OFF and hysteresis (dead band) boundary point (there
are 2 points: top and bottom) position can be shifted. ON/OFF ispossible at a free position.

◆ Area Green：ON◆ Area Red：OFF◆ Area Yellow：Hysteresis (Dead band)[ Setting method ]1. Move the stick, etc. tothe point you want to shift
and touch the [ON/OFF]button. The boundary
points change.

Reverse of ON/
OFF direction

Current stick position[ Setting method] → Box Type● Symmetry

1. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift upper side.
2. Touch the [Upper] button.
The boundary points
change.
3. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift lower side.
4. Touch the [Lower] button.
The boundary points
change.

When Upper(Lower) is set, at thesame time, Lower(Upper) is also set.

Hysteresis ：Hysteresis (dead band) can be set to ON and OFF[Setting method] → Linear Type● Symmetry

1. Move the stick to the off
point you want to shift andtouch the [OFF] button. The
off points change.
2. Move the stick to the on
point you want to shift andtouch the [ON] button. The
on points change.
When Upper (Lower) isset, at the same time,
Lower (Upper) is also set.

182 ＜ Data ＞

Logic switch (Condition select and DG1, DG2)
The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and off by combining two switches. For instance,
the condition is activated when 2 switches are turned on.
Logic mode
AND: When both switches are ON, thecondition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are indifferent states, the condition is ON.

Switch mode selection
1. Tap to the [Mode] "Single" item.
(Logic switch setting screen)

Switch selection
1. Select the switch A and B.

Logic mode selection
1. Tap to the [Logic] item.
2. Select the logic mode.

＜ Data ＞ 183ŸƓƇƄƗƌƑƊ
Your Futaba T18SZ transmitter programming can be updated easily online. When functions are added
RULPSURYHGWKHXSGDWH¿OHFDQEHGRZQORDGHGIURPRXUZHEVLWH&RS\WKHXSGDWH¿OHVWRWKH6'FDUG
and then use the following procedure to update the program.
Check our web site for the FAQ regarding updating for more information.
Updating procedure
Note: If the battery fully discharges during
program updating, updating will fail. Whenthe remaining battery capacity is 50 orless, always recharge the battery before
updating.
Note: The model data in the transmitter canbe used unchanged after updating, but tobe safe, back up the model data before
updating.

5. Insert the SD card with "FUTABA" folder that
contained the update software into the SD
card slot on your T18SZ radio transmitter.

1. Download the zip file of the update datafrom our website.

Futaba WEB
18SZ Update Zip ﬁleDownload

Installed SD card of the
update ﬁle

6. Turn on the transmitter power while pressing
down the "HOME/EXIT" button. The update
screen appears on the LCD display of your
T18SZ and the software update is started.

2. Extract the zip Àle on your computer.
3. The "FUTABA" folder will be created on yourcomputer.
4. Copy the "FUTABA" folder into your SD card.

2
1

Press the HOME/EXIT switch and turn on
Copy the "FUTABA"
folder into your SD card.

Updating
Note: If the SD card has already had "another
FUTABA" folder before you make a copy, the"FUTABA" folder is OVERWRITTEN.

184 ＜ Data ＞

7. When the software update is completed,"Completed" message is shown on the LCD
display of your T18SZ. (Show below picture.)

Complete

8. Turn off the power switch of your T18SZ andremove the SD card from the card slot.

Possible Problems'RQ W DEVROXWHO\ UHPRYH WKH EDWWHU\
DQG WKH 6' FDUG IURP WKH WUDQVPLWWHUGXULQJWKHXSGDWHThere is a possibility that the transmitter
will be damaged.
Recovering a failed update
If you failed to update for any reason, it
may transmitter will not start.
In that case, please update againtransmitter in the following procedure.
1. Detach the battery from the transmitter.
2. Insert the SD card that contained the
update Àles to the transmitter.
3. Attach the battery to the transmitter
while pressing down the "HOME/EXIT"
button.
4. The update will start.
Even after the above steps, if thetransmitter fails to update or does notstart, please have it serviced.

When one of the error messages shown
below appears on the LCD screen your
T18SZ, the software update will not becompleted.

"Low battery."
Software update is postponed becauseof low battery. Retry the software updateafter the battery is recharged.

8SGDWHÀOHQRWIRXQGThe T18SZ cannot Ànd the update Àle on the
SD card. Check to be sure all the updateÀles have been copied onto the SD card.

%URNHQÀOH
The T18SZ detects the update Àle error. The
update file may be broken or for anothertransmitter.

"Write error."The software update procedure is stopped
for an unknown reason. Contact your local
service center when this error message
appears on the LCD screen of your T18SZ.

＜ Data ＞ 185

T14SG/FX-22 ĺT18SZ MODEL DATA CONVERSION
The model data (only latest version) of T14SG/FX-22 can be copied to T18SZ.
* SD card is required.
* The model data of T18SZ cannot be copied to T14SG/
FX-22.
* Functions in T14SG/FX-22, functions not in T18SZ are
not converted.

[Model data conversion method]
1. Attach an SD card that contains model dataof T14SG or FX-22 to the SD slot of a T18SZ.
2. Turn on the power switch, and the Data
Converter should run.

5. The converter can accept model data
made by T14SG or FX-22 with the latest
software only. If you try to convert model
data made by old version software, theconverter must fail to convert and show
the following error message. If this message
is shown, do the following procedure to
update the model data in order to avoid
this limitation.

(a) First, update a T14SG or FX-22 to the latest software.
(b) Load the model data which failed to convert into the
T14SG or FX-22 with the latest software, and the model
data should be updated to the latest format.
(c) Save the updated model data to a SD card.
(d) Retry to convert the updated model data on a T18SZ.

3. The converter shows a list of model data inthe card. Select a model data that you wantto convert and push "CONVERT" → "Yes" key,
and the converter should begin convertingdata.
4. If the convert succeeds, the converter willshow the following message. The converted
data are copied to the internal memoryof the T18SZ. Hence, if the T18SZ does nothave available space in its internal memory,converts must fail.

* When SD card cannot be recognized, it may be able tobe used if it reformats by SD formatter offered from SD
Association.
SD formatter is downloadable from SD Association
https://www.sdcard.org/ (As of June, 2017)

CAUTION$IWHU¿QLVKLQJGDWDFRS\EHVXUHWRSHUIRUPD
complete check of operation with the model tobe used.
Check well all the directions of operation andall the operation switches.

Important: Always check the operation of
the model prior to Àight.

FUTABA CORPORATION
Makuhari Techno-Garden Bldg. B-6F, 1-3 Nakase, Mihama-ku, Chiba, 261-8555, Japan
Phone: +81-43-296-8259, Facsimile: +81-43-296-8253©FUTABA CORPORATION

186 ＜ Data ＞

2017, 8 (2)